1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
46 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
47 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
49 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
51 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
52 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
64 \font_typewriter default
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
73 \default_output_format default
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation indent
133 \paragraph_indentation default
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes false
139 \output_changes false
156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
158 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
159 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
162 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
173 \begin_inset Newline newline
177 \begin_inset Newline newline
181 \begin_inset Note Note
184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
185 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
199 \begin_layout Standard
200 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
201 LatexCommand tableofcontents
208 \begin_layout Chapter
212 \begin_layout Section
216 \begin_layout Standard
217 LyX is a document preparation system.
218 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
219 scripts, publishable books, business
220 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
221 It is unlike most other
222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
229 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
231 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
247 pt type, left justified, 5
248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
256 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
260 \begin_layout Standard
261 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
266 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
270 \begin_layout Standard
275 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
276 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
277 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
278 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
284 manual describes that, too.
287 \begin_layout Section
291 \begin_layout Standard
292 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
294 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
295 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
301 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
302 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
304 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
305 only a vertical scrollbar.
306 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
307 The first case is large images.
308 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
309 image and use the option
315 LaTeX and LyX options
318 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
320 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
321 this doesn't work for equations yet.
324 \begin_layout Standard
325 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
333 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
340 \begin_layout Section
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
346 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
347 Just select the manual you want to read from the
354 \begin_layout Section
356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
358 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
368 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
372 \begin_inset Index idx
375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
381 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
382 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
383 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
385 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
386 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
391 \begin_inset space \space{}
394 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
395 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
397 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
401 \begin_inset Index idx
404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
405 Reconfiguration of LyX
410 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
413 \begin_layout Section
415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
417 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
424 \begin_layout Standard
425 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
426 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
428 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
429 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
433 \begin_layout Standard
434 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
436 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
437 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
440 \begin_layout Standard
441 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
442 you can view from the menu
444 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
464 reconfigure LyX (menu
466 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
470 \begin_inset Note Note
473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
474 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
482 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
483 More about TeX Code is described in section
488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
490 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
494 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
501 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
511 \begin_inset Index idx
514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
515 Reconfiguration of LyX
520 See section 5.1 of the
524 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
527 \begin_layout Chapter
531 \begin_layout Section
532 Basic File Operations
533 \begin_inset Index idx
536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
545 \begin_layout Standard
550 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
551 in addition to some more advanced operations:
554 \begin_layout Itemize
566 \begin_layout Itemize
580 \begin_layout Itemize
592 \begin_layout Itemize
598 \begin_layout Itemize
610 \begin_layout Itemize
620 \begin_layout Itemize
634 \begin_layout Itemize
644 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
662 arg "dialog-show print"
668 \begin_layout Itemize
674 \begin_layout Standard
675 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
676 a few minor differences.
679 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
690 command lists the available templates.
691 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
692 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
693 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
701 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
741 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
742 space is just that — a big, blank space.
750 \begin_layout Standard
771 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
776 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
778 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
796 will reload the document from disk.
797 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
798 and want to restore it to the last save.
807 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
808 them as your changes.
811 \begin_layout Section
812 Basic Editing Features
813 \begin_inset Index idx
816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
825 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
832 \begin_layout Standard
833 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
834 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
835 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
836 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
838 We will start with cut and paste.
841 \begin_layout Standard
842 As you might expect, the
846 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
847 various other editing features.
848 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
852 \begin_layout Itemize
866 \begin_layout Itemize
880 \begin_layout Itemize
894 \begin_layout Itemize
904 \begin_layout Itemize
914 \begin_layout Itemize
930 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
936 \begin_layout Standard
937 The first three are self-explanatory.
939 \begin_inset Index idx
942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
948 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
957 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
958 so that the recieving program may choose the most suitable form.
963 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
964 It will try to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way,
966 if the clipboard contains text as in comma separated values format (CSV),
967 and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be placed into individual
968 cells according to the separators.
977 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
980 \begin_layout Standard
983 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
990 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
992 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback PDF
996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1002 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1003 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1004 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly (e.g.
1005 some programs put an image into the clipboard both as graphics contents,
1006 and as a short text which is often meaningless).
1009 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1011 \begin_inset space ~
1014 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1016 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1031 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1034 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1035 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1037 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1046 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
1047 will start a new paragraph.
1050 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1052 \begin_inset space ~
1055 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1068 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1070 \begin_inset space ~
1073 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1076 paste from the primary selection.
1077 It contains the currently selected text.
1078 This works across different programs if LyX runs on the X Window system
1079 (usually if LyX is compiled for unix or cygwin), otherwise it is LyX internal.
1082 \begin_layout Standard
1083 \begin_inset Index idx
1086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1093 \begin_inset Index idx
1096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1104 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1106 \begin_inset space ~
1110 \begin_inset space ~
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1122 \begin_inset space ~
1128 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1133 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1136 \begin_inset space ~
1145 \begin_inset space ~
1150 button to skip the current word.
1154 \begin_inset space ~
1159 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1163 \begin_inset space ~
1168 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1170 If the toggle is set, searching for
1171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1182 will not match the word
1183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1197 Match whole words only
1199 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1228 LyX offers also an advanced
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1240 feature that is described in sec.
1241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1247 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1254 \begin_layout Standard
1255 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1256 \begin_inset space \space{}
1260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1268 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1270 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1275 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1282 \begin_layout Standard
1283 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1286 arg "inset-select-all"
1292 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1295 selects the whole document.
1298 \begin_layout Section
1300 \begin_inset Index idx
1303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1310 \begin_inset Index idx
1313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1322 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1329 \begin_layout Standard
1330 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1331 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1334 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1337 or the toolbar button
1343 to undo some mistake.
1344 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1346 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1349 or the toolbar button
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1363 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1367 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1370 \begin_layout Standard
1371 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1380 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1381 This is a consequence of the 100
1382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1385 step undo limit mentioned above.
1388 \begin_layout Standard
1397 work on almost everything in LyX.
1398 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1402 \begin_layout Section
1404 \begin_inset Index idx
1407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1416 \begin_layout Standard
1417 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1420 \begin_layout Enumerate
1425 \begin_layout Itemize
1430 once anywhere in the edit window.
1431 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1435 \begin_layout Enumerate
1440 \begin_layout Itemize
1446 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1449 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1452 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1455 \begin_layout Itemize
1456 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1458 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1465 \begin_layout Enumerate
1466 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1470 \begin_layout Standard
1471 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1472 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1476 \begin_layout Section
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Navigating"
1485 \begin_inset Index idx
1488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1497 \begin_layout Standard
1498 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1501 \begin_layout Itemize
1506 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1507 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1510 \begin_layout Itemize
1511 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1513 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1515 \begin_inset space ~
1520 or by the toolbar button
1523 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1529 \begin_layout Itemize
1530 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1532 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1535 and use the same menu to return to them.
1536 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1543 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1548 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1549 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1551 \begin_inset space ~
1556 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1557 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1558 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1559 your last editing position.
1562 \begin_layout Standard
1567 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1570 \begin_layout Subsection
1572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1574 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1581 \begin_layout Standard
1582 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1583 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1584 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1592 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1596 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1603 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1608 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1612 \begin_layout Standard
1613 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1614 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1615 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1616 dialog and to modify the citation.
1619 \begin_layout Standard
1620 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1622 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1623 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1631 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1634 \begin_layout Standard
1635 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1636 you further to control the display.
1641 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1642 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1648 option keeps it in the current view state.
1649 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1650 \begin_inset space ~
1653 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1654 \begin_inset space ~
1657 3, the subsections of sections
1658 \begin_inset space ~
1661 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1666 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1667 \begin_inset space ~
1671 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1681 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1684 \begin_layout Standard
1686 \begin_inset space \space{}
1690 \begin_inset Graphics
1691 filename ../images/reload.png
1696 \begin_inset space ~
1699 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1700 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1703 \begin_inset space \space{}
1707 \begin_inset Graphics
1708 filename ../images/down.png
1710 groupId toolbarbuttons
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1719 \begin_inset space \space{}
1723 \begin_inset Graphics
1724 filename ../images/up.png
1726 groupId toolbarbuttons
1731 \begin_inset space ~
1734 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1735 So, for example, you can move section
1736 \begin_inset space ~
1740 \begin_inset space ~
1743 2.4 or after section
1744 \begin_inset space ~
1748 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1750 \begin_inset Graphics
1751 filename ../images/promote.png
1753 groupId toolbarbuttons
1758 \begin_inset Graphics
1759 filename ../images/demote.png
1761 groupId toolbarbuttons
1765 (or the corresponding key bindings
1773 ) you can change the level of sections.
1774 So you can for example make section
1775 \begin_inset space ~
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1783 \begin_inset space ~
1789 \begin_layout Section
1790 Input/Word Completion
1791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1793 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1798 \begin_inset Index idx
1801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1808 \begin_inset Index idx
1811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1842 \begin_layout Standard
1843 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1845 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1846 is used to propose completions.
1849 \begin_layout Standard
1850 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1852 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1857 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1868 \begin_inset space ~
1873 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1877 \begin_inset space ~
1882 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1883 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1887 \begin_inset space ~
1893 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1894 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1897 \begin_layout Standard
1898 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
1899 are completions available.
1904 key to accept a proposed completion.
1905 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1906 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1907 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1914 \begin_layout Standard
1915 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1916 ing options for text.
1917 The special math option
1921 enables characters to be composed.
1922 If, for example, you want to insert the character
1923 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1926 , you can then input the characters
1927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1938 to a formula to get it.
1939 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
1940 of the math toolbar.
1941 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1945 that is in LyX's installation folder.
1946 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1955 \begin_layout Section
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1967 \begin_inset Index idx
1970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1999 \begin_inset Index idx
2002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2033 \begin_layout Standard
2034 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2047 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2049 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2053 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2060 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2079 \begin_inset space ~
2100 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2104 \begin_layout Labeling
2105 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2109 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2110 LatexCommand nomenclature
2112 description "Tabulator key"
2118 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2119 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2120 \begin_inset space ~
2124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2126 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2133 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2137 , especially section
2138 \begin_inset space ~
2142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2144 reference "sub:Lists"
2150 If you are still confused, look in the
2155 \begin_inset Newline newline
2162 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2163 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2167 \begin_layout Labeling
2168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2172 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2173 LatexCommand nomenclature
2175 description "Escape key"
2182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2189 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2190 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2193 \begin_layout Labeling
2194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2200 \begin_inset space ~
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2211 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2212 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2216 \begin_layout Standard
2217 There are three modifier keys:
2220 \begin_layout Labeling
2221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2239 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2240 LatexCommand nomenclature
2242 description "Control key"
2246 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2247 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2251 \begin_layout Itemize
2260 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2263 \begin_layout Itemize
2272 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2275 \begin_layout Itemize
2284 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2288 \begin_layout Labeling
2289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2307 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2308 LatexCommand nomenclature
2310 description "Shift key"
2314 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2315 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2318 \begin_layout Labeling
2319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2337 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2338 LatexCommand nomenclature
2340 description "Alt or Meta key"
2344 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2345 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2346 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2352 \begin_inset Newline newline
2355 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2357 menu accelerator keys
2360 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2361 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2365 \begin_layout Standard
2366 For example, the sequence
2367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2373 \begin_inset space ~
2377 \begin_inset space ~
2383 \begin_inset space ~
2391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2410 \begin_inset space ~
2416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2426 \begin_layout Standard
2431 manual lists all other things bound to the
2439 \begin_layout Standard
2440 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2441 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2442 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2443 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2444 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2445 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2446 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2448 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2464 followed by a capital
2471 \begin_layout Chapter
2473 \begin_inset Index idx
2476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2485 \begin_layout Section
2487 \begin_inset Index idx
2490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2499 \begin_layout Subsection
2503 \begin_layout Standard
2504 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2505 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2506 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2507 numbering schemes, and so on.
2508 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2509 and format the title of your document differently.
2512 \begin_layout Standard
2517 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2518 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2519 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2520 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2521 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2524 \begin_layout Subsection
2526 \begin_inset Index idx
2529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2538 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2545 \begin_layout Standard
2546 You can select a class using the
2548 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2549 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2553 \begin_inset Index idx
2556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2563 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2567 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2571 \begin_layout Standard
2572 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2576 \begin_layout Description
2577 Article for basic articles
2580 \begin_layout Description
2581 Report for basic reports
2584 \begin_layout Description
2585 Book for writing a book
2588 \begin_layout Description
2589 Letter for US-style letters
2592 \begin_layout Standard
2593 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2594 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2595 will include many of these.
2596 Here are some of the classes.
2597 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2599 Special Document Classes
2608 \begin_layout Description
2609 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2612 \begin_layout Description
2613 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2617 \begin_layout Description
2618 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2622 \begin_layout Description
2623 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2624 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2625 There are three article layouts available.
2626 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2627 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2628 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2629 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2634 sequential numbering
2635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2638 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2639 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2640 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2641 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2644 \begin_layout Description
2645 Beamer Layout for presentations
2648 \begin_layout Description
2649 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2650 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2654 \begin_layout Description
2655 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2658 \begin_layout Description
2660 \begin_inset space ~
2663 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2666 \begin_layout Description
2667 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2670 \begin_layout Description
2671 Foils Used to make transparencies
2674 \begin_layout Description
2675 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2676 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2680 \begin_layout Description
2681 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2682 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2685 \begin_layout Description
2686 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2689 \begin_layout Description
2690 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2693 \begin_layout Description
2694 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2695 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2696 (Is used by this document.)
2699 \begin_layout Description
2700 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2703 \begin_layout Description
2704 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2707 \begin_layout Description
2712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2719 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2720 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2722 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2725 \begin_layout Description
2726 Slides Used to make transparencies
2729 \begin_layout Description
2731 \begin_inset space ~
2734 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2735 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2738 \begin_layout Description
2739 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2742 \begin_layout Standard
2743 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2745 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2751 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2752 of the document classes.
2755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2759 \begin_layout Standard
2760 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2762 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2763 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2765 \begin_inset Index idx
2768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2785 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2786 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2788 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2793 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2794 and some of them, like
2798 , are highly specialized.
2799 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2800 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2802 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2803 by some document class.
2804 There are just too many of them.
2805 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2808 \begin_layout Standard
2809 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2817 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2818 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2819 document class for a new file.
2820 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2825 Installing new LaTeX files
2826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2833 manual for information on how to install them.
2834 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2840 \begin_layout Standard
2841 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2842 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2844 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2845 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2846 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2848 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2852 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
2858 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2870 \begin_inset Index idx
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2882 \begin_layout Standard
2883 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2884 chosen document class.
2885 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2886 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2893 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2907 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2911 \begin_layout Standard
2912 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2913 always installed by default.
2914 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
2915 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2916 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2917 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2918 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2919 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2920 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2923 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2927 \begin_inset Index idx
2930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2931 Reconfiguration of LyX
2937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2940 Installing new LaTeX files
2941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2948 manual for more information on installing required packages.
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2960 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2961 LyX will advise you about these things.
2969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2973 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2978 \begin_inset Index idx
2981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2982 Document ! Local Layout
2990 \begin_layout Standard
2991 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2992 used in a variety of different documents.
2993 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2994 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2995 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2996 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2997 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2998 What you want is LyX's
2999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3015 manual for information on how to use it.
3018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3022 \begin_layout Standard
3023 Each class has a default set of options.
3024 Here's a quick table describing them:
3027 \begin_layout Standard
3028 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3034 \begin_layout Standard
3036 \begin_inset Tabular
3037 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3038 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 \begin_layout Standard
3498 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3504 \begin_layout Standard
3505 You're probably also wondering what
3506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3510 \begin_inset space ~
3514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3518 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3519 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3524 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3529 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3539 headings, there are also
3547 headings, and so on.
3548 We will describe these headings fully in section
3549 \begin_inset space ~
3553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3555 reference "sub:Headings"
3562 \begin_layout Subsection
3564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3566 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3571 \begin_inset Index idx
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3583 \begin_inset Index idx
3586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3595 \begin_layout Standard
3596 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3598 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3605 \begin_inset space ~
3613 \begin_inset space ~
3618 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3620 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3621 to use for your document.
3622 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3626 \begin_layout Standard
3630 \begin_inset space ~
3637 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3643 \begin_inset space ~
3648 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3649 You can choose between the following five options:
3652 \begin_layout Labeling
3653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3658 Use default page style of current class.
3661 \begin_layout Labeling
3662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3667 No page numbers or headings.
3670 \begin_layout Labeling
3671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3679 \begin_layout Labeling
3680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3685 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3686 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3687 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3690 \begin_layout Labeling
3691 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3696 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3697 have the LaTeX-package
3702 \begin_inset Index idx
3705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3706 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3712 How they are defined is explained in section
3713 \begin_inset space ~
3717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3719 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3726 \begin_layout Standard
3727 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3728 \begin_inset space ~
3732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3734 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3741 \begin_layout Subsection
3742 Paper Size and Orientation
3743 \begin_inset Index idx
3746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3747 Document ! Paper size
3753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3755 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3762 \begin_layout Standard
3763 You can find the following options in the menu
3766 \begin_inset space ~
3773 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3779 \begin_inset Index idx
3782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3791 \begin_layout Labeling
3792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3796 \begin_inset space ~
3801 What size paper to print on.
3806 \begin_layout Itemize
3812 \begin_layout Itemize
3818 \begin_layout Itemize
3824 \begin_layout Itemize
3830 \begin_layout Itemize
3833 US letter, US legal, US executive
3836 \begin_layout Itemize
3842 \begin_layout Itemize
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 To choose whether to output as
3866 \begin_layout Labeling
3867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3871 \begin_inset space ~
3876 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3877 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3880 \begin_layout Subsection
3882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3889 \begin_inset Index idx
3892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3899 \begin_inset Index idx
3902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3911 \begin_layout Standard
3912 Paper margins are set in the menu
3914 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3918 \begin_inset Index idx
3921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 \begin_layout Standard
3931 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3932 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3933 the paper format and the font size into account.
3936 \begin_layout Subsection
3940 \begin_layout Standard
3941 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3946 That includes the paragraph environments.
3947 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3948 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3949 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3950 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3959 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3961 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3962 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3963 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3966 \begin_layout Section
3967 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3968 \begin_inset Index idx
3971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3972 Paragraph ! Indentation
3980 \begin_layout Subsection
3982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3984 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3991 \begin_layout Standard
3992 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3993 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3996 \begin_layout Standard
3997 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3998 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3999 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4000 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4004 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4010 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4011 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4012 language than English.
4013 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4017 \begin_layout Standard
4018 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4019 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4021 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4022 LyX takes care of that.
4023 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4025 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4026 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4027 of a page, and so on.
4031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4032 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4037 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4038 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4042 these pre-coded spacings.
4043 We will explain more later.
4046 \begin_layout Subsection
4047 Paragraph Separation
4048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4050 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4055 \begin_inset Index idx
4058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4059 Paragraph ! Separation
4067 \begin_layout Standard
4075 \begin_inset space ~
4083 \begin_inset space ~
4090 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4094 \begin_inset Index idx
4097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4103 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4106 \begin_layout Subsection
4110 \begin_layout Standard
4111 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4114 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4116 \begin_inset space ~
4121 dialog and toggle the
4124 \begin_inset space ~
4129 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4132 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4136 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4137 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4143 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4146 \begin_layout Subsection
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4152 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4160 \begin_layout Standard
4163 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4167 \begin_inset Index idx
4170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4179 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4183 \begin_inset space ~
4192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4193 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4198 \begin_inset Index idx
4201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4202 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4207 installed to use this feature.
4212 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4214 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4216 \begin_inset space ~
4221 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4222 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4225 \begin_layout Section
4226 Paragraph Environments
4227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4229 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4234 \begin_inset Index idx
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4238 Paragraph ! Environments
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4248 Paragraph environments|(
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4260 \begin_layout Standard
4261 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4264 \begin_layout Standard
4283 \begin_inset Newline newline
4286 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4287 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4288 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4297 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 A paragraph environment is simply a
4302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4309 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4310 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4311 scheme, labels, and so on.
4312 Additionally, you can
4313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4320 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4321 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4322 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4323 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4325 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4327 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4330 \begin_layout Standard
4331 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4332 \begin_inset Graphics
4333 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4339 at the left end of the toolbar.
4340 LyX will change the environment of the
4344 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4345 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4346 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4350 \begin_layout Standard
4359 create a new paragraph using the
4363 paragraph environment.
4365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4372 because if you are in one of these environments:
4375 \begin_layout Itemize
4381 \begin_layout Itemize
4387 \begin_layout Itemize
4393 \begin_layout Itemize
4399 \begin_layout Itemize
4405 \begin_layout Itemize
4411 \begin_layout Itemize
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4422 , rather than resetting it to
4427 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4434 reference "sec:Nesting"
4441 \begin_layout Subsection
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4446 The default paragraph environment is
4451 It creates a plain paragraph.
4452 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4453 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4454 this manual) are in the
4461 \begin_layout Standard
4462 You can nest a paragraph using the
4466 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4474 \begin_layout Subsection
4476 \begin_inset Index idx
4479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4498 for thanks or contact information.
4499 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4500 page along with today's date.
4501 For other types of documents, the title
4502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4509 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4528 Here's how you use them:
4531 \begin_layout Itemize
4532 Put the title of your document in the
4539 \begin_layout Itemize
4540 Put the author name in the
4547 \begin_layout Itemize
4548 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4549 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4555 Note that using this environment is optional.
4556 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4557 If you don't want a date, use the option
4559 Suppress default date on front page
4563 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4564 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4566 \begin_inset space ~
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 You can use footnotes to insert
4576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4583 or contact information.
4586 \begin_layout Subsection
4588 \begin_inset Index idx
4591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4607 \begin_layout Standard
4608 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4609 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4612 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Section headings ! Numbered
4626 \begin_layout Standard
4627 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4631 \begin_layout Enumerate
4637 \begin_layout Enumerate
4643 \begin_layout Enumerate
4649 \begin_layout Enumerate
4655 \begin_layout Enumerate
4661 \begin_layout Enumerate
4667 \begin_layout Enumerate
4673 \begin_layout Standard
4674 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4675 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4676 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4679 \begin_layout Standard
4680 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4681 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4682 You group the book into chapters.
4683 LyX does a similar grouping:
4686 \begin_layout Itemize
4691 is divided into either
4702 \begin_layout Itemize
4714 \begin_layout Itemize
4726 \begin_layout Itemize
4738 \begin_layout Itemize
4750 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 \begin_layout Standard
4763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4771 Not all document types use the
4775 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4780 is the top-level heading.
4788 \begin_layout Standard
4793 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4794 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4796 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4810 \begin_inset Index idx
4813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4814 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4822 \begin_layout Standard
4823 The unnumbered section headings have a
4824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4831 at the end of their name.
4832 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4833 the table of contents, see section
4834 \begin_inset space ~
4838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4848 Changing the Numbering
4849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4851 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4860 in the Table of Contents.
4861 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4863 Just as certain classes start with
4877 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4887 This is something you can change.
4890 \begin_layout Standard
4893 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4897 \begin_inset Index idx
4900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4909 \begin_inset space ~
4913 \begin_inset space ~
4918 you will see two counters.
4923 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4925 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4930 Short Titles of Headings
4931 \begin_inset Index idx
4934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4935 Section headings ! Short titles
4941 \begin_inset Argument 1
4944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4953 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4960 \begin_layout Standard
4961 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4962 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4963 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4964 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4967 \begin_layout Standard
4968 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4969 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4970 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4971 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
4974 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4976 \begin_inset space ~
4982 This will insert a box labeled
4983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4987 \begin_inset space ~
4991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4994 which you can use to enter the short title text.
4995 This also works for captions inside floats.
4996 There can only be one short title per title.
4999 \begin_layout Standard
5000 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5007 \begin_layout Standard
5008 The following information applies to all section headings:
5011 \begin_layout Itemize
5012 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5015 \begin_layout Itemize
5016 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5019 \begin_layout Itemize
5020 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5023 \begin_layout Itemize
5024 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5027 \begin_layout Subsection
5028 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5031 \begin_layout Standard
5032 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5046 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5047 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5048 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5049 the text they contain.
5050 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5058 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5062 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5071 when you start a new paragraph.
5072 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5076 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5077 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5078 have to change back to the
5082 environment yourself.
5085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5102 \begin_inset Index idx
5105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5114 \begin_layout Standard
5115 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5116 time for the differences.
5125 are identical except for one difference:
5129 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5138 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5141 \begin_layout Standard
5142 Here's an example of the
5155 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5157 See – no indentation!
5161 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5162 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5163 the other paragraph.
5166 \begin_layout Standard
5167 Here's another example, this time in the
5174 \begin_layout Quotation
5180 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5181 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5182 the first line, then
5186 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5190 you were quoting other text.
5193 \begin_layout Quotation
5194 Here's a new paragraph.
5195 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5196 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5199 \begin_layout Standard
5200 As the examples show,
5204 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5205 They should put quotes in the
5210 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5214 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5223 \begin_inset Index idx
5226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5235 \begin_inset Index idx
5238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5254 \begin_layout Standard
5259 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5265 \begin_inset Newline newline
5268 Which I did not rehearse!
5272 It could be much worse.
5273 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5275 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5276 indented a bit more than the first.
5277 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5283 \begin_inset Newline newline
5286 And make things look fine
5287 \begin_inset Newline newline
5293 arg "newline-insert newline"
5299 \begin_layout Standard
5304 does not indent both margins.
5305 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5306 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5313 arg "newline-insert newline"
5319 \begin_layout Subsection
5321 \begin_inset Index idx
5324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5341 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5351 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5360 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5361 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5362 describing some general features of all four of them.
5365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5369 \begin_layout Standard
5370 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5372 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5381 reset the environment to
5385 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5386 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5387 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5391 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5395 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5402 \begin_layout Standard
5403 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5404 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5406 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5407 you read all of section
5408 \begin_inset space ~
5412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5414 reference "sec:Nesting"
5421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5427 \begin_inset Index idx
5430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5446 \begin_layout Standard
5447 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5451 paragraph environment.
5452 It has the following properties:
5455 \begin_layout Itemize
5456 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5460 \begin_layout Itemize
5461 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5464 \begin_layout Itemize
5465 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5469 \begin_layout Itemize
5470 The items can have any length.
5471 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5472 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5479 \begin_layout Itemize
5484 environment inside another
5488 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5492 \begin_layout Itemize
5493 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5496 \begin_layout Itemize
5497 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5500 \begin_layout Itemize
5502 \begin_inset space ~
5506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5508 reference "sec:Nesting"
5512 for a full explanation of nesting.
5516 \begin_layout Standard
5517 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5526 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5531 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5534 \begin_layout Itemize
5535 The label for the first level
5539 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5543 \begin_layout Itemize
5544 The label for the second level is a dash.
5548 \begin_layout Itemize
5549 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5553 \begin_layout Itemize
5554 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5558 \begin_layout Itemize
5559 Back out to the third level.
5563 \begin_layout Itemize
5564 Back to the second level.
5568 \begin_layout Itemize
5569 Back to the outermost level.
5572 \begin_layout Standard
5573 These are the default labels for an
5578 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5580 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5583 dialog in the submenu
5588 \begin_inset Index idx
5591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5597 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5601 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5602 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5604 \begin_inset space ~
5608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5610 reference "sec:Nesting"
5617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5623 \begin_inset Index idx
5626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 name "sec:Enumerate"
5642 \begin_layout Standard
5647 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5648 It has these properties:
5651 \begin_layout Enumerate
5652 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5656 \begin_layout Enumerate
5657 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5661 \begin_layout Enumerate
5662 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5665 \begin_layout Enumerate
5670 environment resets the counter to one.
5673 \begin_layout Enumerate
5686 \begin_layout Enumerate
5687 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5688 Items can have any length.
5691 \begin_layout Enumerate
5692 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5695 \begin_layout Enumerate
5696 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5699 \begin_layout Enumerate
5700 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5704 \begin_layout Standard
5713 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5714 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5721 \begin_layout Enumerate
5722 The first level of an
5726 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5730 \begin_layout Enumerate
5731 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5735 \begin_layout Enumerate
5736 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5740 \begin_layout Enumerate
5741 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5744 \begin_layout Enumerate
5745 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5750 \begin_layout Enumerate
5751 Back to the third level
5755 \begin_layout Enumerate
5756 Back to the second level.
5760 \begin_layout Enumerate
5761 Back to the outermost level.
5764 \begin_layout Standard
5765 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5769 environment, see section
5770 \begin_inset space ~
5774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5776 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5781 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5785 There is more to nesting
5789 environments than we've stated here.
5790 You should read section
5791 \begin_inset space ~
5795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5797 reference "sec:Nesting"
5801 to learn more about nesting.
5804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5810 \begin_inset Index idx
5813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5823 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5827 list has no fixed label.
5828 Instead, LyX uses the first
5829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5836 of the first line as the label.
5840 \begin_layout Description
5841 Example: This is an example of the
5848 \begin_layout Standard
5849 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5853 \begin_layout Standard
5855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5862 it is meant that the first usage of the
5866 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5868 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5876 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
5881 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5882 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5884 \begin_inset space ~
5890 \begin_inset space ~
5894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5896 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5900 for more information.) Here is an example:
5903 \begin_layout Description
5905 \begin_inset space ~
5908 Example: This one shows how to use a
5911 \begin_inset space ~
5923 \begin_layout Description
5924 Usage: You should use the
5928 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5929 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5931 It's not a good idea to use a
5935 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5936 You're better off using
5948 paragraphs into them.
5951 \begin_layout Description
5952 Nesting: You can nest
5956 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5960 \begin_layout Standard
5961 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5962 them from the first line.
5965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5967 \begin_inset Index idx
5970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5979 \begin_layout Standard
5984 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5987 \begin_layout Standard
5996 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
5998 Here are its properties:
6001 \begin_layout Labeling
6002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6004 \begin_inset space ~
6007 labels LyX uses the first
6008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6015 of each line as the item label.
6020 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6021 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6022 space as described above.
6025 \begin_layout Labeling
6026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6027 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6028 the body of the item text.
6029 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6030 label width plus a little extra space.
6034 \begin_layout Labeling
6035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6037 \begin_inset space ~
6040 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6042 If the label width is larger, the label
6043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6050 into the first line.
6051 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6052 margin of the rest of the item text.
6055 \begin_layout Labeling
6056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6058 \begin_inset space ~
6061 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6066 environment has the same left margin.
6067 \begin_inset Newline newline
6070 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6073 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6075 \begin_inset space ~
6080 dialog (toolbar button
6083 arg "layout-paragraph"
6090 \begin_inset space ~
6095 determines the default label width.
6096 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6105 multiple times instead.
6106 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6115 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6118 \begin_inset space ~
6123 every time you alter a label in a
6128 \begin_inset Newline newline
6131 The predefined default width is the length of
6132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6140 \begin_inset space ~
6146 \begin_layout Standard
6151 list the same way as the
6155 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6161 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6170 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6171 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Standard
6187 There is yet another feature of the
6191 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6193 You can use additional
6197 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6202 are documented in section
6203 \begin_inset space ~
6207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6209 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6214 Here are some examples:
6217 \begin_layout Labeling
6218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6219 Left The default for
6226 \begin_layout Labeling
6227 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6228 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6235 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6238 \begin_layout Labeling
6239 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6240 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6244 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6251 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6254 \begin_layout Subsection
6256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6258 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6263 \begin_inset Index idx
6266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6275 \begin_layout Standard
6276 The features described in this section require that the module
6278 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6280 is loaded in the document settings.
6281 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6286 \begin_inset Index idx
6289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6290 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6299 Custom Enumerate Lists
6300 \begin_inset Index idx
6303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6304 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6312 \begin_layout Standard
6314 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6317 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6320 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6321 There you add the command
6324 \begin_layout Standard
6332 \begin_layout Standard
6333 in TeX Code (shortcut
6343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6344 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6345 \begin_inset space ~
6349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6351 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6364 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6371 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6372 For capital Roman numerals replace
6384 in the command above.
6385 For Arabic numerals use
6393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6400 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6415 \begin_layout Standard
6417 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6425 You can only number 26
6426 \begin_inset space ~
6429 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6437 \begin_layout Standard
6438 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6439 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6442 \begin_layout Standard
6443 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6446 \begin_layout Enumerate
6447 \begin_inset Argument 1
6450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6476 \begin_layout Enumerate
6477 \begin_inset Argument 1
6480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6503 \begin_layout Enumerate
6508 \begin_layout Enumerate
6509 \begin_inset Argument 1
6512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6536 \begin_layout Enumerate
6537 \begin_inset Argument 1
6540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6566 \begin_layout Standard
6567 For this list these commands were used:
6570 \begin_layout Standard
6581 \begin_inset Newline newline
6589 \begin_inset Newline newline
6597 \begin_inset Newline newline
6607 \begin_layout Standard
6614 makes the label emphasized and
6623 \begin_layout Standard
6624 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6632 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6633 lists until you change the definition.
6641 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6643 \begin_inset Index idx
6646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6647 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6655 \begin_layout Standard
6656 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6659 \begin_layout Enumerate
6660 \begin_inset Argument 1
6663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6682 \begin_inset Note Note
6685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6686 goes back to default numbering
6694 \begin_layout Enumerate
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6702 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6706 \begin_layout Standard
6707 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6712 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6713 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6717 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6725 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6733 \begin_layout Standard
6734 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6736 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6737 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6738 of a normal enumeration.
6739 There, insert the command
6742 \begin_layout Standard
6748 \begin_layout Standard
6753 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6757 \begin_layout Enumerate
6761 \begin_layout Enumerate
6765 \begin_layout Standard
6766 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6769 \begin_layout Enumerate
6770 \begin_inset Argument 1
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6789 This enumeration starts at 4
6792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6794 \begin_inset Index idx
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6807 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6809 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6812 \begin_layout Itemize
6816 \begin_layout Itemize
6817 with standard spacing
6820 \begin_layout Standard
6821 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6823 Add there the command
6827 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6830 \begin_layout Itemize
6831 \begin_inset Argument 1
6834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Itemize
6857 \begin_layout Itemize
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6862 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6868 \begin_inset Index idx
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6872 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6878 For more information see its documentation,
6879 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6888 \begin_layout Standard
6889 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6891 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6892 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6896 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6911 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6924 \begin_layout Enumerate
6925 with negative indentation
6928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6929 Further Customization
6930 \begin_inset Index idx
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 Lists ! Customization
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6943 You can also change the style of description lists.
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6953 \begin_layout Standard
6954 changes the description label font, the command
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6963 \begin_layout Standard
6964 sets the list style.
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 An example where the command
6971 \begin_layout Standard
6976 itshape, style=nextline
6979 \begin_layout Standard
6983 \begin_layout Description
6985 \begin_inset space ~
6989 \begin_inset Argument 1
6992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6998 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7000 itshape, style=nextline
7010 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7011 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7015 \begin_layout Description
7017 \begin_inset space ~
7020 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7021 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7022 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7025 \begin_layout Standard
7026 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7032 \begin_inset Index idx
7035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7036 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7042 For more information see its documentation
7043 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7052 \begin_layout Subsection
7054 \begin_inset Index idx
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7074 \begin_inset space ~
7082 \begin_layout Standard
7083 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7091 \begin_inset space ~
7097 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7098 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7099 In contrast, you can use the
7106 \begin_inset space ~
7111 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7112 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7117 Of course, you're not limited to using
7124 \begin_inset space ~
7133 \begin_inset space ~
7138 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7139 some European academic papers.
7142 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7146 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7153 \begin_layout Standard
7158 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7159 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7163 \begin_inset space ~
7168 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7169 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7170 Here's an example of each:
7173 \begin_layout Right Address
7175 \begin_inset Newline newline
7179 \begin_inset Newline newline
7183 \begin_inset Newline newline
7186 When is it? What is today?
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7193 \begin_inset space ~
7199 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7200 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7201 Here's an example of the
7208 \begin_layout Address
7210 \begin_inset Newline newline
7213 Where do I send this
7214 \begin_inset Newline newline
7217 Your post office and country
7220 \begin_layout Standard
7221 As you can see, both
7228 \begin_inset space ~
7233 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7238 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7244 This makes sense, since
7252 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7253 Thus, you have to use
7260 arg "newline-insert newline"
7265 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7266 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7268 \begin_inset space ~
7272 \begin_inset space ~
7277 ) to start a new line in an
7284 \begin_inset space ~
7292 \begin_layout Subsection
7296 \begin_layout Standard
7297 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7298 or list of references.
7299 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7306 \begin_inset Index idx
7309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7318 \begin_layout Standard
7323 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7324 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7325 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7326 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7340 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7341 The book document classes ignores the
7345 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7349 in a letter document class.
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7357 environment does several things for you.
7358 First, it puts the centered label
7359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7367 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7369 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7370 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7371 the subsequent text.
7372 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7373 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7378 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7382 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7383 The new paragraph will still be in the
7388 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7389 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7392 \begin_layout Standard
7393 \begin_inset Float figure
7398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7400 \begin_inset Graphics
7401 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7409 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7414 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7436 We would love to demonstrate the
7440 environment, but since this document is in the
7441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7448 class, we can't do this.
7449 We inserted it therefore as figure
7450 \begin_inset space ~
7454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7456 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7461 If you have never heard of an
7462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7469 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7478 \begin_inset Index idx
7481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7490 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7497 \begin_layout Standard
7502 environment is used to list references.
7503 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7504 only use it at the end of the document.
7516 \begin_layout Standard
7517 When you first open a
7521 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7537 depending on the document class.
7538 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7539 Each paragraph of the
7543 environment is a bibliography entry.
7548 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7549 Each new paragraph is still in the
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7557 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7558 by using a BibTeX database.
7559 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7560 phy handling, have a look at section
7561 \begin_inset space ~
7565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7567 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7574 \begin_layout Subsection
7578 \begin_inset Index idx
7581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7582 Paragraph ! LyX code
7588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7597 \begin_layout Standard
7602 environment is another LyX extension.
7603 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7608 key as a fixed whitespace;
7612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7624 \begin_inset space ~
7629 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7634 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7635 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7638 arg "newline-insert newline"
7655 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7656 So, when you finish using the
7660 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7661 Also, you can nest the
7665 environment inside of others.
7668 \begin_layout Standard
7669 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7672 \begin_layout Itemize
7676 arg "newline-insert newline"
7679 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7684 \begin_inset space \space{}
7694 arg "newline-insert newline"
7700 \begin_layout Itemize
7704 arg "newline-insert newline"
7715 \begin_layout Itemize
7720 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7727 \begin_layout Itemize
7731 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7738 \begin_layout Itemize
7739 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7740 You must put at least one
7744 in any line you want blank.
7745 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7748 \begin_layout Itemize
7749 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7753 since that will insert
7758 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7761 arg "self-insert \""
7767 \begin_layout Standard
7771 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7775 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7779 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7783 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7787 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7788 printf("Hello World!
7793 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7797 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7801 \begin_layout Standard
7802 This is just the standard
7803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7814 \begin_layout Standard
7819 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7820 rc-files, and so on.
7821 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7822 as if you used a typewriter.
7823 \begin_inset Index idx
7826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7827 Paragraph environments|)
7832 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7835 Program Code Listings
7840 \begin_inset space ~
7848 \begin_layout Section
7849 Nesting Environments
7850 \begin_inset Index idx
7853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7854 Nesting ! Environments
7860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7869 \begin_layout Subsection
7873 \begin_layout Standard
7874 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7876 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7878 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7880 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7892 \begin_layout Enumerate
7896 \begin_layout Enumerate
7901 \begin_layout Enumerate
7905 \begin_layout Enumerate
7910 \begin_layout Enumerate
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7916 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7918 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7920 \begin_inset space ~
7924 \begin_inset space ~
7932 \begin_inset space ~
7936 \begin_inset space ~
7941 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
7943 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7946 arg "depth-increment"
7952 arg "depth-decrement"
7966 arg "depth-increment"
7972 arg "depth-decrement"
7976 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
7977 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7982 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7983 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7984 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7985 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7988 \begin_layout Standard
7989 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7990 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7992 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7995 \begin_layout Subsection
7996 What You Can and Can't Nest
7999 \begin_layout Standard
8000 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8001 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8005 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8006 than a simple yes or no.
8007 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8010 \begin_layout Itemize
8011 Completely unnestable
8014 \begin_layout Itemize
8015 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8019 \begin_layout Itemize
8020 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8024 \begin_layout Standard
8025 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8026 environments have them:
8029 \begin_layout Description
8030 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8031 Can't nest into them.
8035 \begin_layout Itemize
8041 \begin_layout Itemize
8047 \begin_layout Itemize
8053 \begin_layout Itemize
8059 \begin_layout Itemize
8066 \begin_layout Description
8068 \begin_inset space ~
8071 Nestable You can nest them.
8072 You can nest other things into them.
8076 \begin_layout Itemize
8082 \begin_layout Itemize
8088 \begin_layout Itemize
8094 \begin_layout Itemize
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8106 \begin_layout Itemize
8112 \begin_layout Itemize
8118 \begin_layout Itemize
8125 \begin_layout Description
8126 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8127 You can't nest anything into them.
8131 \begin_layout Itemize
8137 \begin_layout Itemize
8143 \begin_layout Itemize
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8155 \begin_layout Itemize
8161 \begin_layout Itemize
8167 \begin_layout Itemize
8173 \begin_layout Itemize
8179 \begin_layout Itemize
8185 \begin_layout Itemize
8191 \begin_layout Itemize
8197 \begin_layout Itemize
8203 \begin_layout Itemize
8209 \begin_layout Itemize
8213 \begin_inset space ~
8219 \begin_layout Itemize
8226 \begin_layout Standard
8227 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8235 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8245 \begin_inset space ~
8248 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8249 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8250 nested section headings violate this.
8258 \begin_layout Subsection
8259 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8260 \begin_inset Index idx
8263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8264 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8272 \begin_layout Standard
8273 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8274 affected by nesting anyhow.
8278 \begin_layout Itemize
8282 \begin_layout Itemize
8286 \begin_layout Itemize
8290 \begin_layout Standard
8292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8300 Figures and tables in
8304 are not affected by this.
8309 Have a look at section
8310 \begin_inset space ~
8314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8316 reference "sec:Floats"
8320 for more information about
8327 \begin_layout Standard
8328 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8329 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8333 \begin_layout Standard
8334 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8342 of its own, it behaves just like a
8343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8350 paragraph environment.
8351 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 Here's an example with a table:
8359 \begin_layout Enumerate
8364 \begin_layout Enumerate
8365 This is (a) and it's nested.
8369 \begin_layout Standard
8370 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8376 \begin_layout Standard
8378 \begin_inset Tabular
8379 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8380 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8381 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8382 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8466 \begin_layout Standard
8467 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8474 \begin_layout Enumerate
8476 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8480 \begin_layout Enumerate
8484 \begin_layout Standard
8485 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8488 \begin_layout Enumerate
8493 \begin_layout Enumerate
8494 This is (a) and it's nested.
8498 \begin_layout Standard
8499 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8505 \begin_layout Standard
8507 \begin_inset Tabular
8508 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8509 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8510 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8511 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8595 \begin_layout Standard
8596 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8602 \begin_layout Enumerate
8609 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8612 \begin_layout Enumerate
8616 \begin_layout Standard
8617 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8621 \begin_layout Standard
8622 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8624 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8627 \begin_layout Enumerate
8632 \begin_layout Enumerate
8633 This is (a) and it's nested.
8636 \begin_layout Standard
8637 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8643 \begin_layout Standard
8645 \begin_inset Tabular
8646 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8647 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8648 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8649 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8735 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8741 \begin_layout Enumerate
8743 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8750 \begin_layout Enumerate
8754 \begin_layout Standard
8755 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8761 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8762 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8766 \begin_layout Subsection
8767 Usage and General Features
8770 \begin_layout Standard
8771 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8780 is the innermost possible depth.
8781 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8784 \begin_layout Enumerate
8785 level #1 – outermost
8789 \begin_layout Enumerate
8794 \begin_layout Enumerate
8799 \begin_layout Enumerate
8804 \begin_layout Itemize
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8818 \begin_layout Standard
8819 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8820 both of them in the example.
8821 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8831 For example, if we tried to nest another
8836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8843 , we would get errors.
8846 \begin_layout Subsection
8848 \begin_inset Index idx
8851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8861 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8862 We have several examples of nested environments.
8863 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8868 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8871 \begin_layout Labeling
8872 \labelwidthstring MMM
8873 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8882 \begin_layout Labeling
8883 \labelwidthstring MMM
8884 #2-a This is level #2.
8885 We created it by using
8888 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8894 arg "depth-increment"
8901 \begin_layout Labeling
8902 \labelwidthstring MMM
8903 #3-a This is level #3.
8904 This time, we just enter
8911 arg "depth-increment"
8915 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8919 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8925 arg "depth-increment"
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8937 environment, nested inside of
8938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8946 So, it's at level #4.
8947 We did this by entering
8950 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8956 arg "depth-increment"
8959 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8964 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8980 \begin_layout Standard
8985 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8988 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8994 \begin_layout Labeling
8995 \labelwidthstring MMM
8996 #4-a This is level #4.
9000 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9003 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9008 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9012 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9017 keep nesting things inside
9018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9029 \begin_layout Labeling
9030 \labelwidthstring MMM
9031 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9036 \begin_layout Labeling
9037 \labelwidthstring MMM
9038 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9039 and this is level #6.
9040 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9044 \begin_layout Labeling
9045 \labelwidthstring MMM
9046 #5-b Back to level #5.
9050 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9056 arg "depth-decrement"
9063 \begin_layout Labeling
9064 \labelwidthstring MMM
9068 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9074 arg "depth-decrement"
9077 , we're back at level #4.
9081 \begin_layout Labeling
9082 \labelwidthstring MMM
9083 #3-b Back to level #3.
9084 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9088 \begin_layout Labeling
9089 \labelwidthstring MMM
9090 #2-b Back to level #2.
9095 \begin_layout Labeling
9096 \labelwidthstring MMM
9097 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9098 After this sentence, we will enter
9102 and change the paragraph environment back to
9109 \begin_layout Standard
9110 We could have also used the
9126 environment in place of the
9131 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9135 Example 2: Inheritance
9138 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9139 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9142 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9151 arg "depth-increment"
9155 \begin_inset Newline newline
9158 which, we will change to the
9166 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 environment, at level #2.
9174 \begin_layout Enumerate
9175 Notice how the nested
9179 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9183 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9188 We ended this example by entering
9193 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9197 and reset the nesting depth by using
9200 arg "depth-decrement"
9206 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9207 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9216 \begin_inset Argument 1
9219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9220 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9228 \begin_layout Enumerate
9229 This is level #1, in an
9233 paragraph environment.
9234 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9238 \begin_layout Enumerate
9243 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9249 arg "depth-increment"
9253 Now, what happens if we nest an
9257 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9258 label be? An asterisk?
9262 \begin_layout Itemize
9272 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9273 So, its label is a bullet.
9274 (We got here by using
9277 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9283 arg "depth-increment"
9286 , then changing the environment to
9294 \begin_layout Itemize
9295 Here's level #4, produced using
9298 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9304 arg "depth-increment"
9308 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9316 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9321 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9325 , because we are in the
9333 environment (that is, it is an
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9354 type of numbering does LyX use?
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9361 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9364 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9367 \begin_layout Enumerate
9371 arg "depth-decrement"
9374 to decrease the depth after the next
9377 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9384 \begin_layout Enumerate
9386 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9390 \begin_layout Enumerate
9392 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9393 numeral as the label.Why?
9396 \begin_layout Enumerate
9397 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9406 Notice, however, that LyX
9410 reset the counter for the label.
9414 \begin_layout Enumerate
9418 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9424 arg "depth-decrement"
9427 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9428 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9429 into the twofold-nested
9437 \begin_layout Enumerate
9438 The same thing happens if we do another
9441 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9447 arg "depth-decrement"
9450 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9453 \begin_layout Standard
9454 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9459 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9473 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9479 The same rule applies for the
9483 environment, as well.
9486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9487 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9490 \begin_layout Enumerate
9491 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9492 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9493 the same detail with how we did it.
9502 \begin_layout Standard
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9517 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9518 the example in parentheses someplace.
9519 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9520 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9521 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9525 \begin_layout Enumerate
9530 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9535 Now we will add verse.
9536 \begin_inset Newline newline
9539 It will get much worse.
9540 \begin_inset Newline newline
9550 arg "depth-increment"
9561 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9562 \begin_inset Newline newline
9565 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9566 \begin_inset Newline newline
9572 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9585 \begin_layout Standard
9586 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9592 \begin_layout Standard
9594 \begin_inset Tabular
9595 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9596 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9597 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9598 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9687 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9697 arg "depth-increment"
9703 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9713 arg "depth-decrement"
9720 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 : level #1) This is another item.
9726 Note that selecting a
9730 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9731 3 times to put the table inside the
9739 \begin_layout Quotation
9740 We're now ending the
9744 list and changing to
9749 We're still at level #1.
9750 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9751 The next set of paragraphs is a
9752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9759 We will nest both the
9766 \begin_inset space ~
9771 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9775 for the letter body.
9779 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9782 to preserve the depth.
9783 Remember that you need to use
9786 arg "newline-insert newline"
9789 to create multiple lines inside the
9796 \begin_inset space ~
9806 \begin_layout Right Address
9808 \begin_inset Newline newline
9811 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9812 \begin_inset Newline newline
9818 \begin_layout Address
9820 \begin_inset space ~
9826 \begin_layout Quotation
9827 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9831 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9832 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9833 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9834 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9835 as soon as possible.
9836 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9839 \begin_layout Quotation
9840 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9841 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9842 with your order, along with payment.
9845 \begin_layout Quotation
9846 We thank you again for your patience.
9849 \begin_layout Address
9851 \begin_inset Newline newline
9858 \begin_layout Quotation
9859 That ends that example!
9862 \begin_layout Standard
9863 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9864 just a few keystrokes.
9865 We could have easily nested an
9886 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9889 \begin_layout Section
9890 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9891 \begin_inset Index idx
9894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9903 \begin_layout Standard
9904 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9905 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9906 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
9907 be broken at the end of a line.
9908 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9912 \begin_layout Subsection
9914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9916 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9921 \begin_inset Index idx
9924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9933 \begin_layout Standard
9934 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9936 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9940 Further documentation is given in section
9941 \begin_inset Newline newline
9945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9947 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9955 \begin_layout Standard
9956 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9971 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9980 A protected space is set with
9982 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9983 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9985 \begin_inset space ~
9993 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
9999 \begin_layout Subsection
10001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10003 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10008 \begin_inset Index idx
10011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10012 Spacing ! Horizontal
10020 \begin_layout Standard
10021 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10023 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10024 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10028 The length units are listed in Appendix
10029 \begin_inset space ~
10033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10035 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10042 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10046 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10051 \begin_inset Index idx
10054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10055 Spaces ! Inter-word
10063 \begin_layout Standard
10064 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10065 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10066 at the ends of sentences.
10067 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10068 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10069 followed by a period; see section
10070 \begin_inset space ~
10074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10076 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10081 To insert a normal space, select
10083 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10084 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10086 \begin_inset space ~
10094 arg "space-insert normal"
10100 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10104 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10109 \begin_inset Index idx
10112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10121 \begin_layout Standard
10123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10130 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10139 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10140 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10141 inside abbreviations:
10144 \begin_layout Quote
10146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10150 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10153 \begin_layout Standard
10154 or between values and units.
10155 Compare for example this:
10156 \begin_inset Newline newline
10160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10164 \begin_inset Newline newline
10167 10 kg (normal space
10170 \begin_layout Standard
10171 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10173 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10174 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10176 \begin_inset space ~
10184 arg "space-insert thin"
10190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10194 \begin_layout Standard
10195 You can also insert the following space types:
10198 \begin_layout Description
10200 \begin_inset space ~
10204 \begin_inset space ~
10207 space A line with a
10208 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10212 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10216 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10219 negative thin space between the arrows.
10222 \begin_layout Description
10224 \begin_inset space ~
10228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10232 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10236 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10240 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10244 \begin_inset space ~
10248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10251 em) space between the arrows.
10254 \begin_layout Description
10256 \begin_inset space ~
10260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10264 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10268 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10272 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10276 \begin_inset space ~
10280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10283 em) space between the arrows.
10286 \begin_layout Description
10288 \begin_inset space ~
10292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10296 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10300 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10304 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10308 \begin_inset space ~
10312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10315 em) space between the arrows.
10318 \begin_layout Description
10320 \begin_inset space ~
10324 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10328 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10333 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10340 cm space between the arrows.
10343 \begin_layout Standard
10345 \begin_inset space ~
10349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10351 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10355 lists the different space sizes.
10358 \begin_layout Standard
10359 \begin_inset Float table
10364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10366 \begin_inset Caption
10368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10371 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10375 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10385 \begin_inset Tabular
10386 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10387 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10389 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10612 \begin_inset Index idx
10615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10624 \begin_layout Standard
10625 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10626 in a uniform fashion.
10627 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10628 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10629 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10630 equally between themselves.
10633 \begin_layout Standard
10634 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10637 \begin_layout Quote
10639 This is on the left side
10640 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10643 This is on the right
10646 \begin_layout Quote
10649 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10653 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10659 \begin_layout Quote
10662 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10666 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10670 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10676 \begin_layout Standard
10677 That was an example in the
10683 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10687 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10691 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10694 is one in a standard paragraph.
10695 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10699 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10706 \begin_inset space ~
10711 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10714 \begin_layout Standard
10716 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10720 \begin_inset space ~
10726 \begin_layout Standard
10728 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10732 \begin_inset space ~
10738 \begin_layout Standard
10740 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10744 \begin_inset space ~
10750 \begin_layout Standard
10752 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10756 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_layout Standard
10764 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10768 \begin_inset space ~
10774 \begin_layout Standard
10776 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10780 \begin_inset space ~
10786 \begin_layout Standard
10787 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10795 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10799 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10800 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10801 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10805 option in the space dialog.
10813 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10817 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10822 \begin_inset Index idx
10825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10834 \begin_layout Standard
10835 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10836 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10843 What is correct English?:
10844 \begin_inset Newline newline
10848 \begin_inset Newline newline
10852 \begin_inset space ~
10855 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10856 \begin_inset Newline newline
10860 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10871 \begin_inset Newline newline
10875 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10886 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10892 \begin_layout Standard
10894 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10899 \begin_inset space ~
10903 \begin_inset space ~
10907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10911 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10913 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10914 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10918 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10924 \begin_inset space ~
10928 \begin_inset space ~
10932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10935 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10944 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10945 That is why it is named
10946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10954 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10955 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10959 \begin_layout Subsection
10961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10963 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10968 \begin_inset Index idx
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10980 \begin_layout Standard
10981 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10983 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10984 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10986 \begin_inset space ~
10992 There you find the following sizes:
10995 \begin_layout Standard
11008 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11013 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11015 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11016 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11018 \begin_inset space ~
11024 \begin_inset Index idx
11027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11028 Document ! Settings
11033 for the paragraph separation.
11034 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11045 \begin_layout Standard
11051 \begin_inset Index idx
11054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11060 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11061 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11066 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11067 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11076 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 s are described in section
11086 \begin_inset space ~
11090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11092 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11101 If there are several
11105 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11106 You can therefore use
11110 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11113 \begin_layout Standard
11118 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11119 \begin_inset space ~
11123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11125 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11132 \begin_layout Standard
11133 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11143 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11144 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11156 \begin_layout Subsection
11157 Paragraph Alignment
11158 \begin_inset Index idx
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 Paragraph ! Alignment
11170 \begin_layout Standard
11171 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11173 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11176 dialog (toolbar button
11179 arg "layout-paragraph"
11183 There are five possibilities:
11186 \begin_layout Itemize
11194 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11200 \begin_layout Itemize
11208 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11214 \begin_layout Itemize
11222 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11228 \begin_layout Itemize
11236 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11242 \begin_layout Itemize
11250 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11256 \begin_layout Standard
11257 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11258 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11259 the left and right margins.
11260 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11263 \begin_layout Standard
11265 This paragraph is right aligned,
11268 \begin_layout Standard
11270 this one is centered,
11273 \begin_layout Standard
11275 this one is left aligned.
11278 \begin_layout Subsection
11280 \begin_inset Index idx
11283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 Page breaks ! Forced
11290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11292 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11299 \begin_layout Standard
11300 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11301 can force a page break where you want one.
11302 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11303 Only if you use a lot of
11307 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11310 \begin_layout Standard
11311 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11312 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11316 have to change the page breaking.
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11320 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11322 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11324 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11325 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11327 \begin_inset space ~
11333 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11335 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11336 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11338 \begin_inset space ~
11343 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11345 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11346 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11349 \begin_layout Standard
11350 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11351 at the top of a page.
11352 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11353 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11354 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11355 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11359 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11363 to learn more about
11370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11374 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11379 \begin_inset Index idx
11382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11383 Page breaks ! Clear
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11392 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11393 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11394 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11395 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11396 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11399 \begin_layout Standard
11400 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11402 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11403 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11405 \begin_inset space ~
11411 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11413 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11414 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11416 \begin_inset space ~
11420 \begin_inset space ~
11425 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11426 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11429 \begin_layout Subsection
11431 \begin_inset Index idx
11434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11443 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11450 \begin_layout Standard
11451 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11453 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11455 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11456 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11458 \begin_inset space ~
11462 \begin_inset space ~
11470 arg "newline-insert newline"
11474 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11476 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11477 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11479 \begin_inset space ~
11483 \begin_inset space ~
11491 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11494 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11496 This is useful to avoid
11497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11504 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11507 \begin_layout Standard
11508 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11509 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11510 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11511 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11512 \begin_inset space ~
11516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11518 reference "sec:Quote"
11523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11525 reference "sec:Verse"
11530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11532 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11539 \begin_layout Subsection
11541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11543 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11548 \begin_inset Index idx
11551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11577 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11578 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11580 \begin_inset space ~
11585 you can insert horizontal lines.
11586 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11587 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11588 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11591 \begin_layout Standard
11593 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11604 \begin_layout Section
11605 Characters and Symbols
11608 \begin_layout Standard
11609 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11610 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11611 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11619 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11623 for information on how this is done.
11626 \begin_layout Standard
11627 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11632 dialog via the menu
11634 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11635 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11641 \begin_layout Standard
11642 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11650 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11651 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11652 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11660 \begin_layout Section
11661 Fonts and Text Styles
11662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11664 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11671 \begin_layout Subsection
11673 \begin_inset Index idx
11676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11685 \begin_layout Standard
11686 There are two types of fonts:
11689 \begin_layout Description
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset Index idx
11698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11704 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11709 characters) in the font.
11710 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11711 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11712 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11713 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11714 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11715 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11716 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11717 \begin_inset Newline newline
11720 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11721 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11722 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11723 sizes than at small ones.
11724 \begin_inset Newline newline
11738 \begin_inset space ~
11746 \begin_layout Description
11748 \begin_inset space ~
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11761 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11762 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11763 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11764 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11765 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11766 image manipulation program.
11767 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11768 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11769 \begin_inset space ~
11772 pixels high up to 34
11773 \begin_inset space ~
11776 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11777 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11778 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11780 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11781 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11782 \begin_inset Newline newline
11785 Bitmap fonts are named
11788 \begin_inset space ~
11793 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11796 \begin_layout Standard
11797 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11798 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11799 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11800 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11801 use scalable fonts.
11804 \begin_layout Standard
11805 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11808 \begin_layout Standard
11809 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11810 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11811 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11812 font to emphasize text, you use an
11813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11821 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11822 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11826 \begin_layout Subsection
11828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11830 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11837 \begin_layout Standard
11838 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11839 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11840 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11842 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11843 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11844 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
11845 to a word processor.
11846 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11847 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11848 across different machines.
11849 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
11850 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
11852 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11854 \begin_inset space ~
11858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11860 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11865 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
11866 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11870 \begin_layout Standard
11871 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
11872 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
11874 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11875 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
11876 that is installed on your system.
11877 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11880 \begin_layout Standard
11881 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11889 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11890 es; so you might have to experiment.
11898 \begin_layout Standard
11899 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11907 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11908 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11916 \begin_layout Subsection
11917 Document Font and Font size
11918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11920 name "sub:Document-Font"
11925 \begin_inset Index idx
11928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 \begin_inset Index idx
11938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11947 \begin_layout Standard
11948 You can set the document fonts in the
11950 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11954 \begin_inset Index idx
11957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11958 Document ! Settings
11968 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11969 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11972 \begin_inset space ~
11981 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
11982 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
11983 with the roman font.
11986 \begin_layout Standard
11993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12002 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12003 This requires that you use
12009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12048 as the output format, i.
12049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12053 \begin_inset space \space{}
12056 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12057 \begin_inset space ~
12061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12063 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12068 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12069 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12071 \begin_inset space ~
12074 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12075 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12076 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12078 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12081 \begin_layout Standard
12082 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12087 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12092 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12093 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12100 \begin_inset space ~
12106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12119 European Computer Modern
12122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12129 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12132 \begin_layout Standard
12141 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12142 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12147 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12150 \begin_inset space ~
12155 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12161 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12162 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12165 \begin_layout Itemize
12169 \begin_inset space ~
12174 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12187 \begin_inset space ~
12192 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12196 as the default font.
12197 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12198 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12201 \begin_inset space ~
12214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12215 One difference is improved kerning.
12223 \begin_layout Itemize
12227 \begin_inset space ~
12231 \begin_inset space ~
12236 fonts in (the rare) case that
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12244 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12259 Virtual means that it
12260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12271 -glyphs from other fonts.
12272 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12294 Loading the LaTeX-package
12299 \begin_inset Index idx
12302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12303 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12308 with the document preamble line
12309 \begin_inset Newline newline
12316 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12317 \begin_inset Newline newline
12322 will fix the guillemet problem.
12327 and that accented characters are not
12331 glyph, but built of
12335 characters, the accent and the letter.
12336 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12342 If you search for example for the French word
12343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12350 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12359 and not for the glyph
12360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12374 \begin_layout Itemize
12375 If you do not like the look of
12383 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12388 \begin_inset space ~
12394 \begin_inset space ~
12404 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12405 \begin_inset space ~
12408 serif and typewriter fonts,
12412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12413 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12429 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12434 \begin_inset space \space{}
12442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12446 \begin_inset space \space{}
12452 \begin_inset space ~
12460 \begin_inset space ~
12470 but you can also select your own.
12471 \begin_inset Newline newline
12474 The differences between roman,
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12486 fonts are explained in section
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12493 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12498 \begin_inset Newline newline
12504 \begin_inset space ~
12509 was originally designed for newspapers.
12510 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12511 into the small newspaper columns.
12515 \begin_inset space ~
12520 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12523 \begin_layout Standard
12524 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12537 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12542 depends on the class you are using.
12543 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12546 \begin_layout Standard
12547 Note that the font size is the
12552 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12553 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12554 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12557 \begin_inset space ~
12563 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12570 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12577 \begin_layout Standard
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12586 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12588 \begin_inset space ~
12591 serif or typewriter.
12596 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12606 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12609 \begin_layout Standard
12618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12627 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12633 \begin_inset Index idx
12636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12637 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12654 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12655 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12662 \begin_layout Standard
12663 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12665 Use Old Style Figures
12669 Use True Small Caps
12672 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12675 Use Old Style Figures
12677 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12679 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12687 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12691 Use True Small Caps
12693 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12694 of scaled capitals.
12695 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12696 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12699 \begin_layout Standard
12704 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12705 a font to display the script characters.
12709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12715 \begin_inset Index idx
12718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12719 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12724 So this has no effect for the document language
12738 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12750 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12754 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12755 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12756 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12758 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12761 dialog, see section
12762 \begin_inset space ~
12766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12768 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12780 \begin_layout Subsection
12781 Using Different Character Styles
12782 \begin_inset Index idx
12785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12792 \begin_inset Index idx
12795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12804 \begin_layout Standard
12805 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12806 certain paragraph environments.
12807 LyX supports two character styles,
12816 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12820 \begin_layout Standard
12825 style, do one of the following:
12828 \begin_layout Itemize
12829 click on the toolbar button
12838 \begin_layout Itemize
12839 use the key binding
12848 \begin_layout Standard
12849 These commands are all toggles.
12854 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12857 \begin_layout Standard
12858 One typically uses the
12862 style for proper names.
12864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12871 is the original author of LyX.
12872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12878 \begin_layout Standard
12879 A more widely used character style is the
12884 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12891 \begin_layout Itemize
12892 clicking on the toolbar button
12901 \begin_layout Itemize
12902 using the keybindings
12911 \begin_layout Standard
12916 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12917 es use a different font.
12920 \begin_layout Standard
12921 We've been using the
12925 style all over the place in this document.
12926 Here's one more example:
12929 \begin_layout Quotation
12932 Do not overuse character styles!
12935 \begin_layout Standard
12936 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12937 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12938 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12939 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
12943 \begin_layout Standard
12944 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12952 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12954 \begin_inset space ~
12957 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12963 arg "dialog-show character"
12969 \begin_layout Subsection
12970 Fine-Tuning with the
12975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12977 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12982 \begin_inset Index idx
12985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12994 \begin_layout Standard
12995 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
12996 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12997 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12998 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12999 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13000 from ordinary dialog.
13003 \begin_layout Standard
13004 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13005 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13006 \begin_inset Newline newline
13009 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13010 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13013 \begin_layout Standard
13014 To use custom character styles, open the
13016 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13018 \begin_inset space ~
13021 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13024 dialog or press the toolbar button
13027 arg "dialog-show character"
13031 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13032 font property that you can choose.
13033 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13036 \begin_inset space ~
13041 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13046 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13047 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13048 environments all at once.
13051 \begin_layout Standard
13052 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13055 \begin_inset space ~
13067 \begin_layout Labeling
13068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13082 The possible options are:
13086 \begin_layout Labeling
13087 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13092 This is the Roman font family.
13093 Normally a serif font.
13094 It's also the default family.
13104 \begin_layout Labeling
13105 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13109 \begin_inset space ~
13116 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13128 \begin_layout Labeling
13129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13136 This is the Typewriter font family.
13142 arg "font-typewriter"
13151 \begin_layout Labeling
13152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13157 This corresponds to the print weight.
13162 \begin_layout Labeling
13163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13168 This is the Medium font series.
13169 It's also the default series.
13172 \begin_layout Labeling
13173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13180 This is the Bold font series.
13193 \begin_layout Labeling
13194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13199 As the name implies.
13204 \begin_layout Labeling
13205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13210 This is the Upright font shape.
13211 It's also the default shape.
13214 \begin_layout Labeling
13215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13229 s the Italic font shape
13235 \begin_layout Labeling
13236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13243 This is the Slanted font shape
13245 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13248 \begin_layout Labeling
13249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13253 \begin_inset space ~
13260 This is the Small caps font shape
13267 \begin_layout Labeling
13268 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13273 Alters the text color.
13274 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13283 , which means that the document default color set in
13285 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13286 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13292 \begin_inset space ~
13297 is used, you can choose between
13330 \begin_inset Index idx
13333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13342 \begin_layout Labeling
13343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13348 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13349 the language of the document.
13350 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13352 \begin_inset Newline newline
13355 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13356 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13357 When using the spell checking (see section
13358 \begin_inset space ~
13362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13364 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13368 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13371 \begin_layout Labeling
13372 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13377 Alters the size of the font.
13378 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13379 proportional to the document font size.
13380 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13381 what you want to do.
13386 \begin_layout Labeling
13387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13408 arg "font-size tiny"
13414 \begin_layout Labeling
13415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13436 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13442 \begin_layout Labeling
13443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13464 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13470 \begin_layout Labeling
13471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13492 arg "font-size small"
13498 \begin_layout Labeling
13499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13513 It's also the default size.
13517 arg "font-size normal"
13523 \begin_layout Labeling
13524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13545 arg "font-size large"
13551 \begin_layout Labeling
13552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13573 arg "font-size larger"
13579 \begin_layout Labeling
13580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13601 arg "font-size largest"
13607 \begin_layout Labeling
13608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13629 arg "font-size huge"
13635 \begin_layout Labeling
13636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13657 arg "font-size giant"
13663 \begin_layout Labeling
13664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13669 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13689 arg "font-size increase"
13695 \begin_layout Labeling
13696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13701 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13721 arg "font-size decrease"
13728 \begin_layout Standard
13733 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13734 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13735 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13736 — use those instead.
13737 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13740 \begin_layout Labeling
13741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13746 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13751 \begin_layout Labeling
13752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13759 This is text with emphasize on
13762 This might seem like the same as
13766 , but it is actually a bit different.
13772 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13774 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13777 \begin_layout Labeling
13778 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13785 This is text with Underbar on.
13791 arg "font-underline"
13797 \begin_inset Newline newline
13802 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13803 when you could not change fonts.
13804 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13805 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13809 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13812 \begin_layout Labeling
13813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13817 \begin_inset space ~
13824 This is text with Double underbar on.
13830 arg "font-underunderline"
13834 \begin_inset Newline newline
13837 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13838 about double underbar.
13841 \begin_layout Labeling
13842 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13846 \begin_inset space ~
13853 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13859 arg "font-underwave"
13863 \begin_inset Newline newline
13866 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13867 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13870 \begin_layout Labeling
13871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13878 This is text with Strikeout on.
13884 arg "font-strikeout"
13888 \begin_inset Newline newline
13891 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13892 changed in the meantime.
13895 \begin_layout Labeling
13896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13903 This is text with Noun on.
13910 , this is a logical attribute.
13911 Normally it's equivalent to
13914 \begin_inset space ~
13923 \begin_layout Standard
13924 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13925 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
13927 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13929 \begin_inset space ~
13932 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13938 arg "dialog-show character"
13941 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
13942 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13945 arg "textstyle-apply"
13949 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13953 \begin_layout Standard
13954 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13961 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13962 (suppose you just set the shape to
13963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13981 \begin_inset space ~
13993 \begin_layout Standard
13994 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14002 \begin_inset space ~
14014 \begin_layout Itemize
14020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14027 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14045 \begin_inset Newline newline
14049 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14063 \begin_inset Note Note
14066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14067 For more on phantoms see section
14068 \begin_inset space ~
14072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14074 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14084 \begin_inset Newline newline
14090 \begin_layout Itemize
14095 fonts use characters with serifs.
14096 These are the small
14097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14104 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14105 The following example shows the difference:
14106 \begin_inset Newline newline
14110 \begin_inset Newline newline
14115 text without serifs
14118 \begin_inset Newline newline
14121 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14122 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14129 \begin_layout Itemize
14134 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14135 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14136 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14139 \begin_layout Standard
14140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14147 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14148 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14151 \begin_inset space ~
14156 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14157 the property to be removed.
14158 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14159 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14160 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14178 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14179 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14187 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14191 \begin_inset space ~
14196 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14207 If you, for example, set
14208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14226 \begin_inset space ~
14231 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14240 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14243 \begin_layout Standard
14244 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14245 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14248 \begin_layout Section
14249 Printing and Previewing
14252 \begin_layout Subsection
14256 \begin_layout Standard
14257 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14258 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14259 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14260 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14261 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14263 Additional Features
14268 \begin_layout Standard
14269 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14270 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14271 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14272 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14273 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14274 This happens in two stages:
14277 \begin_layout Enumerate
14278 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14279 generating a file with the extension,
14280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14294 \begin_layout Enumerate
14295 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14299 file to produce printable output.
14302 \begin_layout Subsection
14303 Output file formats
14304 \begin_inset Index idx
14307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14316 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14324 Simple text (ASCII)
14325 \begin_inset Index idx
14328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14329 File formats ! ASCII
14337 \begin_layout Standard
14338 This file type has the extension
14339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14351 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14355 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14362 \begin_layout Standard
14363 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14365 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14366 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14368 \begin_inset space ~
14374 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14375 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14376 \begin_inset space ~
14380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14382 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14387 If your document includes such material, use
14389 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14390 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14392 \begin_inset space ~
14396 \begin_inset space ~
14400 \begin_inset space ~
14408 \begin_inset space ~
14412 \begin_inset space ~
14418 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14419 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14424 \begin_inset Index idx
14427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14428 File formats ! LaTeX
14436 \begin_layout Standard
14437 This file type has the extension
14438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14449 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14451 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14452 it manually with console commands.
14453 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14454 you view or export your document.
14457 \begin_layout Standard
14458 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14460 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14461 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14476 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14477 \begin_inset space ~
14481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14483 reference "sub:Export"
14490 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14492 \begin_inset Index idx
14495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14504 \begin_layout Standard
14505 This file type has the extension
14506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14526 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14527 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14528 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14532 \begin_layout Standard
14533 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14534 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14535 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14536 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14537 when you view the DVI.
14538 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14541 \begin_layout Standard
14542 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14544 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14545 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14550 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14551 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14553 \begin_inset space ~
14560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14570 The latter option uses the program
14579 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14580 font access (see section
14581 \begin_inset space ~
14585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14587 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14592 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14593 standard TeX processor.
14596 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14598 \begin_inset Index idx
14601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14602 File formats ! PostScript
14610 \begin_layout Standard
14611 This file type has the extension
14612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14624 PostScript was developed by the company
14628 as a printer language.
14629 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14631 PostScript can be seen as a
14632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14635 programming language
14636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14639 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14644 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14650 \begin_inset Index idx
14653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14654 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14664 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14667 \begin_layout Standard
14668 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14672 Encapsulated PostScript
14673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14676 (EPS, file extension
14677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14689 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14690 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14691 If, for example, you have 50
14692 \begin_inset space ~
14695 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14696 \begin_inset space ~
14699 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14700 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14701 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14702 EPS to avoid this problem.
14705 \begin_layout Standard
14706 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14708 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14709 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14717 \begin_inset Index idx
14720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14727 \begin_inset Index idx
14730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14739 \begin_layout Standard
14740 This file type has the extension
14741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14757 Portable Document Format
14758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14765 was derived from PostScript.
14766 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14775 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14776 looks exactly the same.
14779 \begin_layout Standard
14780 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14784 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14788 (JPG, file extension
14789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14816 Portable Network Graphics
14817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14820 (PNG, file extension
14821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14833 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14834 background to one of these formats.
14835 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14836 will slow down your workflow.
14837 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
14840 \begin_layout Standard
14841 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14843 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14849 \begin_layout Description
14851 \begin_inset space ~
14854 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14858 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14861 \begin_layout Description
14863 \begin_inset space ~
14870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14877 X) This uses the program
14881 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14886 is a new engine, derived from
14890 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14891 access (see section
14892 \begin_inset space ~
14896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14898 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14903 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14904 standard TeX processor.
14907 \begin_layout Description
14909 \begin_inset space ~
14916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14923 X) This uses the program
14927 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14932 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14933 font access (see section
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14940 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14945 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
14946 vertically written Japanese.
14949 \begin_layout Description
14951 \begin_inset space ~
14954 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14958 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14962 \begin_layout Description
14964 \begin_inset space ~
14967 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14971 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14972 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14976 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14977 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
14980 \begin_layout Standard
14984 \begin_inset space ~
14993 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14994 works without problems.
14995 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14996 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15000 \begin_inset space ~
15007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15019 \begin_inset space ~
15026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15035 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15045 \begin_inset Index idx
15048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15049 FileFormats ! XHTML
15055 \begin_inset Index idx
15058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15067 \begin_layout Standard
15068 This file type has the extension
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15081 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15082 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15083 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15084 suitable for the purpose.
15085 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15087 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15088 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15091 between different formats, which are described in section
15093 Math Output in XHTML
15098 \begin_inset space ~
15106 \begin_layout Standard
15107 XHTML output remains
15108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15115 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15118 LyX and the World Wide Web
15122 Additional Features
15124 manual, for more information.
15127 \begin_layout Standard
15128 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15130 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15131 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15137 \begin_layout Subsection
15139 \begin_inset Index idx
15142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15151 \begin_layout Standard
15152 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15153 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15162 or use the toolbar button
15169 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15170 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15177 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15181 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15189 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15194 Further output formats can be selected via
15196 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15197 View (Other Formats)
15199 or the toolbar button
15200 \begin_inset Graphics
15201 filename ../images/view-others.png
15203 groupId toolbarbuttons
15210 \begin_layout Standard
15211 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15212 viewer window using the menu
15214 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15219 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15220 Update (Other Formats)
15225 \begin_layout Standard
15226 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15228 To have a real output, export your document.
15231 \begin_layout Subsection
15232 Printing the File from within LyX
15233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15235 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15242 \begin_layout Standard
15243 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15244 it directly from within LyX.
15245 To print a file, select the menu
15247 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15253 arg "dialog-show print"
15256 ) or click on the toolbar button
15259 arg "dialog-show print"
15263 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15264 This file is then processed by the program
15268 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15273 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15276 \begin_layout Standard
15277 You can set the following print parameters in the
15280 \begin_inset space ~
15288 \begin_layout Labeling
15289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15294 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15299 Note that this printer name is for the program
15308 has to be configured for this printer name.
15309 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15316 reference "sub:Printer"
15325 The printer should understand PostScript.
15328 \begin_layout Labeling
15329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15334 The name of a file to print to.
15335 The output will be a PostScript file.
15336 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15340 \begin_layout Standard
15341 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15342 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15343 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15344 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15345 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15346 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15347 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15350 \begin_layout Section
15351 A few Words about Typography
15352 \begin_inset Index idx
15355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15364 \begin_layout Subsection
15365 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15366 \begin_inset Index idx
15369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15376 \begin_inset Index idx
15379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15388 \begin_layout Standard
15390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15401 character comes in four lengths: the
15413 , and the minus sign:
15414 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15420 \begin_layout Standard
15421 \begin_inset Tabular
15422 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15423 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15424 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15425 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15426 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15427 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15456 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15521 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15523 \begin_inset space ~
15526 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15533 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15558 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15560 \begin_inset space ~
15563 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15584 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15618 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15624 \begin_layout Standard
15625 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15637 character multiple times in a row.
15638 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15639 the final output, but not in LyX.
15641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15671 \begin_layout Standard
15672 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15673 math mode and has a length of its own.
15674 Here are some examples:
15677 \begin_layout Enumerate
15678 line- and page-breaks
15679 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15689 \begin_layout Enumerate
15691 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15701 \begin_layout Enumerate
15702 Oh — there's a dash.
15703 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15713 \begin_layout Enumerate
15714 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15718 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15728 \begin_layout Subsection
15730 \begin_inset Index idx
15733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15742 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15749 \begin_layout Standard
15750 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15751 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15756 \begin_inset Index idx
15759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15760 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15765 following the rules of the document language.
15768 \begin_layout Standard
15769 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15774 font and with unusual constructs, like
15775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15783 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15785 This is done with the menu
15787 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15788 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15790 \begin_inset space ~
15796 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15797 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15800 \begin_layout Standard
15801 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15802 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15812 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15820 as a hyphenation possibility.
15821 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15822 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15823 as described in section
15824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15827 Prevent Hyphenation
15828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15834 \begin_inset space ~
15842 \begin_layout Subsection
15844 \begin_inset Index idx
15847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15857 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15860 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15867 \begin_layout Standard
15868 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15869 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15870 LaTeX then adds the
15871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15874 appropriate amount of space.
15875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15878 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15880 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15881 gets after another word.
15884 \begin_layout Standard
15885 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15886 not work in all cases.
15888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15899 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15900 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15903 \begin_layout Standard
15904 Here are some examples of
15908 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15911 \begin_layout Itemize
15916 \begin_layout Itemize
15921 \begin_layout Standard
15922 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15925 \begin_layout Itemize
15927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15931 this is too much space!
15934 \begin_layout Itemize
15939 \begin_layout Standard
15940 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15943 \begin_layout Standard
15944 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15947 \begin_layout Enumerate
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15956 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15957 \begin_inset space ~
15961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15963 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15968 \begin_inset Index idx
15971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15972 Spaces ! inter-word
15980 \begin_layout Enumerate
15984 \begin_inset space ~
15989 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15990 \begin_inset space ~
15994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15996 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16001 \begin_inset Index idx
16004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16013 \begin_layout Enumerate
16017 \begin_inset space ~
16021 \begin_inset space ~
16025 \begin_inset space ~
16032 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16034 \begin_inset space ~
16039 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16040 This function is also bound to
16043 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16049 \begin_layout Standard
16050 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16053 \begin_layout Itemize
16055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16059 \begin_inset space \space{}
16062 this is too much space!
16065 \begin_layout Itemize
16066 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16070 \begin_layout Standard
16071 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16072 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16073 will take care of this.
16076 \begin_layout Standard
16077 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16081 \begin_inset space ~
16086 feature described in the section
16092 Additional Features
16097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16099 \begin_inset Index idx
16102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16103 Typography ! Quotes
16109 \begin_inset Index idx
16112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16143 \begin_layout Standard
16144 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16145 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16146 and use a closing quote at the end.
16148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16156 The keyboard character,
16160 , generates this automatically.
16163 \begin_layout Standard
16164 You can specify what character the
16168 key produces using the submenu
16174 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16178 \begin_inset Index idx
16181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16182 Document ! Settings
16192 There are six choices:
16195 \begin_layout Labeling
16196 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16219 \begin_layout Labeling
16220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16223 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16227 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16233 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16237 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16243 \begin_layout Labeling
16244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16247 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16251 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16257 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16261 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16267 \begin_layout Labeling
16268 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16271 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16275 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16281 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16285 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16291 \begin_layout Labeling
16292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16295 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16299 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16305 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16309 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16315 \begin_layout Labeling
16316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16319 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16323 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16329 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16333 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16339 \begin_layout Standard
16340 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16343 arg "quote-insert single"
16349 \begin_layout Subsection
16351 \begin_inset Index idx
16354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16355 Typography ! Ligatures
16361 \begin_inset Index idx
16364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16395 name "sub:Ligatures"
16402 \begin_layout Standard
16403 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16404 print them as single characters.
16405 These groups are known as
16410 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16412 Here are the standard ligatures:
16415 \begin_layout Itemize
16419 \begin_layout Itemize
16423 \begin_layout Itemize
16427 \begin_layout Itemize
16431 \begin_layout Itemize
16435 \begin_layout Standard
16436 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16439 \begin_layout Standard
16440 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16441 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16449 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16465 To break a ligature, use
16467 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16468 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16470 \begin_inset space ~
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16488 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16513 \begin_layout Subsection
16515 \begin_inset Index idx
16518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16527 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16534 \begin_layout Standard
16535 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16536 characters in different sizes and heights.
16537 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16538 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16558 \begin_inset Note Note
16561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16562 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16570 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16571 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16576 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16577 following proper names:
16580 \begin_layout Description
16581 LyX The name of the game, write
16582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16603 \begin_layout Description
16604 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16626 \begin_layout Description
16627 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16649 \begin_layout Description
16650 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16673 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16678 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16686 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16687 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16688 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16691 : The actual version is
16692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16699 , the previous one was
16700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16710 \begin_layout Standard
16711 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16712 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16713 In LyX this will look like
16714 \begin_inset Graphics
16715 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16721 \begin_inset Newline newline
16724 For more about TeX Code, see section
16725 \begin_inset space ~
16729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16731 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16738 \begin_layout Subsection
16740 \begin_inset Index idx
16743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16752 \begin_layout Standard
16753 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16754 space between two words.
16755 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16765 for units use the menu
16767 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16768 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16770 \begin_inset space ~
16778 arg "space-insert thin"
16784 \begin_layout Standard
16785 Here is an example to show the differences:
16788 \begin_layout Standard
16789 \begin_inset Tabular
16790 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16791 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16792 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16793 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16800 \begin_inset space ~
16804 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16816 space between number and unit
16823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16832 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16844 half space between number and unit
16857 \begin_layout Subsection
16859 \begin_inset Index idx
16862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16863 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16871 \begin_layout Standard
16872 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16874 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16875 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16876 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16877 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16878 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16879 These bits of text became known as
16890 \begin_layout Standard
16891 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16892 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16893 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16894 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16895 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16896 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
16897 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
16902 tweak that behavior.
16903 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16904 \begin_inset space ~
16908 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16910 key "latexcompanion"
16915 \begin_inset space ~
16919 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16925 ) may have more information.
16926 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16929 \begin_layout Chapter
16930 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
16931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16933 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16940 \begin_layout Standard
16941 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16944 \begin_inset space ~
16950 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16953 \begin_layout Section
16955 \begin_inset Index idx
16958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16975 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16978 \begin_layout Description
16980 \begin_inset space ~
16983 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16984 \begin_inset Newline newline
16988 \begin_inset Note Note
16991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16992 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17000 \begin_layout Description
17001 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17002 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17004 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17005 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17018 \begin_inset space ~
17024 \begin_inset Newline newline
17028 \begin_inset Note Comment
17031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17032 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17040 \begin_layout Description
17042 \begin_inset space ~
17045 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17046 set in the document settings under
17048 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17050 \begin_inset space ~
17056 \begin_inset Newline newline
17060 \begin_inset Newline newline
17064 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17073 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17074 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17079 of a comment that appears in the output.
17085 \begin_inset Newline newline
17089 \begin_inset Newline newline
17092 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17095 \begin_layout Standard
17096 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17104 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17108 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17111 \begin_layout Section
17113 \begin_inset Index idx
17116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17125 name "sec:Footnotes"
17132 \begin_layout Standard
17133 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17136 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17139 or the toolbar button
17142 arg "footnote-insert"
17154 \begin_inset Graphics
17155 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17164 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17193 label, the box will
17197 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17198 Clicking on the box label again will close
17211 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17212 and click on the footnote
17227 \begin_layout Standard
17228 Here is an example footnote:
17236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17237 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17245 \begin_layout Standard
17246 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17247 position where the footnote box is placed.
17248 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17249 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17250 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17251 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17256 ey are described in the
17259 \begin_inset space ~
17267 \begin_layout Section
17269 \begin_inset Index idx
17272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17281 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17288 \begin_layout Standard
17289 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17290 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17292 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17294 \begin_inset space ~
17299 or the toolbar button
17302 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17328 appearing within your text.
17329 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17338 \begin_layout Standard
17339 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17343 \begin_inset Marginal
17346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17348 This is a marginal note.
17356 \begin_layout Standard
17357 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17358 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17359 pages, right on odd pages.
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17363 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17366 \begin_inset space ~
17374 \begin_inset space ~
17382 \begin_layout Section
17383 Graphics and Images
17384 \begin_inset Index idx
17387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17394 \begin_inset Index idx
17397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17406 name "sec:Graphics"
17413 \begin_layout Standard
17414 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17415 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17418 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17423 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17427 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17430 \begin_layout Standard
17431 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17436 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17437 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17439 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17440 \begin_inset space ~
17444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17446 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17453 \begin_layout Standard
17458 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17459 of the image in the output.
17460 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17468 \begin_inset space ~
17477 \begin_inset space ~
17481 \begin_inset space ~
17485 \begin_inset space ~
17490 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17491 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17499 \begin_layout Standard
17506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17514 \begin_inset space ~
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17534 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17535 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17539 \begin_inset space ~
17544 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17545 with the image size is printed.
17549 \begin_inset space ~
17553 \begin_inset space ~
17557 \begin_inset space ~
17562 is explained in the
17565 \begin_inset space ~
17577 \begin_layout Standard
17578 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17579 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17581 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17584 \begin_layout Standard
17586 \begin_inset Graphics
17587 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17595 \begin_layout Standard
17596 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17597 the image into a float, see section
17598 \begin_inset space ~
17602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17604 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17611 \begin_layout Subsection
17613 \begin_inset Index idx
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17625 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17632 \begin_layout Standard
17633 You can insert images in any known file format.
17634 But as we explained in section
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17641 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17645 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17646 LyX therefore uses the program
17650 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17651 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17652 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17653 \begin_inset space ~
17657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17659 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17666 \begin_layout Standard
17667 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17670 \begin_layout Description
17672 \begin_inset space ~
17675 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17676 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17677 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17681 Graphics Interchange Format
17682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17685 (GIF, file extension
17686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17698 \begin_inset Index idx
17701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17733 Portable Network Graphics
17734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17737 (PNG, file extension
17738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17750 \begin_inset Index idx
17753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17785 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17789 (JPG, file extension
17790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17814 \begin_inset Index idx
17817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17848 \begin_layout Description
17850 \begin_inset space ~
17853 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17855 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17856 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17857 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17858 \begin_inset Newline newline
17861 Scalable image formats can be
17862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17865 Scalable Vector Graphics
17866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17869 (SVG, file extension
17870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17882 \begin_inset Index idx
17885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17917 Encapsulated PostScript
17918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17921 (EPS, file extension
17922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17934 \begin_inset Index idx
17937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17969 Portable Document Format
17970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17973 (PDF, file extension
17974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17986 \begin_inset Index idx
17989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18004 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18005 result will not be scalable.
18006 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18012 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18020 \begin_layout Standard
18021 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18028 \begin_layout Subsection
18029 Grouping of Image Settings
18030 \begin_inset Index idx
18033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18034 Images ! Settings grouping
18042 \begin_layout Standard
18043 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18045 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18046 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18048 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18049 need to manually change each of them.
18053 \begin_layout Standard
18054 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18057 \begin_inset space ~
18061 \begin_inset space ~
18076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18084 \begin_inset space ~
18088 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18105 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18106 and checking the name of the desired group.
18109 \begin_layout Section
18111 \begin_inset Index idx
18114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18130 \begin_layout Standard
18131 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18134 arg "tabular-insert"
18139 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18143 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18144 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18145 from the rest of the table.
18146 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18147 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18149 Here is an example table:
18152 \begin_layout Standard
18154 \begin_inset Tabular
18155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18156 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18360 \begin_layout Subsection
18364 \begin_layout Standard
18365 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18368 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18372 This brings up the table dialog.
18373 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18374 cursor is placed currently.
18375 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18376 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18377 done on all of your selection.
18380 \begin_layout Standard
18381 In addition to the table dialog, the
18384 \begin_inset space ~
18389 helps you in setting table properties.
18390 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18393 \begin_layout Standard
18397 \begin_inset space ~
18402 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18403 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18404 current cell respectively.
18405 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18407 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18408 of text, see section
18409 \begin_inset space ~
18413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18415 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18422 \begin_layout Standard
18423 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18424 using the check box
18433 This will merge the cells to
18437 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18438 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18439 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18440 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18441 in the last row without the upper border:
18444 \begin_layout Standard
18446 \begin_inset Tabular
18447 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18448 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18449 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18450 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18451 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18452 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18463 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18472 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18548 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18583 \begin_layout Standard
18584 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18585 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18586 explained in the chapter
18593 \begin_inset space ~
18599 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18603 degrees counterclockwise.
18604 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18607 \begin_layout Standard
18608 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18616 Most DVI-viewers are
18620 able to display rotations.
18628 \begin_layout Standard
18633 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18638 adds lines for all cell borders.
18641 \begin_layout Subsection
18643 \begin_inset Index idx
18646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18647 Tables ! Longtables
18653 \begin_inset Index idx
18656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18665 \begin_layout Standard
18666 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18669 \begin_inset space ~
18673 \begin_inset space ~
18682 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18683 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18686 \begin_layout Description
18691 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18692 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18693 except for the first page, if
18696 \begin_inset space ~
18704 \begin_layout Description
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18713 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18714 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18717 \begin_layout Description
18722 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18723 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18724 except for the last page, if
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_layout Description
18739 \begin_inset space ~
18744 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18745 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18748 \begin_layout Description
18749 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18750 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18752 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18756 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18759 \begin_inset space ~
18767 \begin_layout Standard
18768 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18769 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18770 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18776 In this context, first means first in this order:
18779 \begin_inset space ~
18791 \begin_inset space ~
18796 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18799 \begin_layout Standard
18801 \begin_inset Tabular
18802 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18803 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18804 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18805 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18806 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18807 <row endfirsthead="true">
18808 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18814 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18819 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 <row endfirsthead="true">
18839 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18859 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18871 <row endhead="true">
18872 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18883 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18892 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18902 <row endhead="true">
18903 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18914 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18923 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <row endfoot="true">
18936 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18947 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18956 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20577 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20917 <row endlastfoot="true">
20918 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 \begin_layout Subsection
20957 \begin_inset Index idx
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20969 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20976 \begin_layout Standard
20977 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20978 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20979 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20980 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20984 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20987 \begin_layout Standard
20988 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20989 for the column in the table dialog.
20990 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20991 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20995 \begin_layout Standard
20997 \begin_inset Tabular
20998 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20999 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21000 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21001 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21002 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21147 This is longer now.
21152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21204 This is longer now.
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 \begin_layout Standard
21236 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21237 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21243 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21249 Selection with the mouse or with
21253 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21254 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21255 the selection from outside the table.
21258 \begin_layout Section
21260 \begin_inset Index idx
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21279 \begin_layout Subsection
21283 \begin_layout Standard
21284 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21285 have a fixed location.
21287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21294 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21302 \begin_inset space ~
21307 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21308 too many notes on the current page.
21311 \begin_layout Standard
21312 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21313 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21314 and pages without text.
21315 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21316 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21317 Floats are therefore numbered.
21318 Referencing is described in section
21319 \begin_inset space ~
21323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21325 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21332 \begin_layout Standard
21333 To insert a float, use the menu
21335 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21339 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21340 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21342 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21343 \begin_inset Index idx
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21353 paragraph within the float.
21354 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21355 by left-clicking on the box label.
21356 A closed float box looks like this:
21357 \begin_inset Graphics
21358 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21363 – a gray button with a red label.
21366 \begin_layout Standard
21367 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21368 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21371 \begin_layout Subsection
21375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21379 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21384 \begin_inset Index idx
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 Floats ! Figure floats
21396 \begin_layout Standard
21398 \begin_inset space ~
21402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21404 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21408 was created using the menu
21410 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21411 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21417 arg "float-insert figure"
21421 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21424 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21430 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21434 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21435 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21437 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21439 \begin_inset space ~
21447 arg "layout-paragraph"
21453 \begin_layout Standard
21454 \begin_inset Float figure
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 \begin_inset Graphics
21462 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21477 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21481 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21494 \begin_layout Standard
21495 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21496 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21498 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21507 ) and refer to it using the menu
21509 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21515 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21519 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21520 vague references like
21521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21528 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21538 For more about cross-references, see section
21539 \begin_inset space ~
21543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21545 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21552 \begin_layout Standard
21553 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21554 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21555 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21556 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21557 as described in section
21558 \begin_inset space ~
21562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21564 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21570 \begin_inset space ~
21574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21576 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21580 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21581 You can also set the images one below the other.
21583 \begin_inset space ~
21587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21589 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21596 reference "fig:Platypus"
21600 are the subfigures.
21603 \begin_layout Standard
21604 \begin_inset Float figure
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21614 \begin_inset Float figure
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21625 name "fig:Undefinable"
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 \begin_inset Graphics
21639 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21650 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21654 \begin_inset Float figure
21659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21665 name "fig:Platypus"
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 \begin_inset Graphics
21679 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21691 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21703 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21707 Two distorted images.
21720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21722 \begin_inset Index idx
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21726 Floats ! Table floats
21734 \begin_layout Standard
21735 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21737 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21738 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21741 or the toolbar button
21744 arg "float-insert table"
21748 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21749 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21750 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21752 \begin_inset space ~
21756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21758 reference "tab:Table-float"
21765 \begin_layout Standard
21766 \begin_inset Float table
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21772 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21777 name "tab:Table-float"
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 \begin_inset Tabular
21792 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21793 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21794 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21795 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21796 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21944 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21947 \end{array}\right]$
21955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21968 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21989 \begin_layout Subsection
21991 \begin_inset Index idx
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 \begin_layout Standard
22004 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22005 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22006 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22008 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22016 \begin_inset space ~
22024 \begin_layout Section
22026 \begin_inset Index idx
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 \begin_layout Standard
22039 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22041 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22042 \begin_inset space \space{}
22049 \begin_layout Standard
22050 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22052 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22056 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22057 and its alignment within the page.
22060 \begin_layout Standard
22062 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22072 height_special "totalheight"
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22078 This is a minipage.
22079 The text is set in an italic style.
22082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22086 another formatting.
22094 \begin_layout Standard
22095 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22098 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22102 as described in section
22103 \begin_inset space ~
22107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22109 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22114 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22120 \begin_layout Standard
22121 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22131 height_special "totalheight"
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22135 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22136 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22142 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22146 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22156 height_special "totalheight"
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22160 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22161 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22169 \begin_layout Standard
22170 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22176 \begin_layout Standard
22177 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22179 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22186 \begin_inset space ~
22194 \begin_layout Chapter
22195 Mathematical Formulas
22196 \begin_inset Index idx
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 \begin_inset Index idx
22209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22240 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22247 \begin_layout Standard
22248 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22253 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22256 \begin_layout Section
22258 \begin_inset Index idx
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 \begin_layout Standard
22271 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22284 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22286 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22287 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22288 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22290 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22296 \begin_layout Standard
22297 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22301 \begin_inset space ~
22306 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22309 \begin_layout Standard
22310 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22311 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22314 \begin_layout Standard
22315 This is a line with an inline formula
22316 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22322 \begin_layout Standard
22323 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22324 paragraph, like this one:
22325 \begin_inset Formula
22332 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22335 \begin_layout Standard
22336 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22337 For example, typing
22338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22351 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22352 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22356 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22359 \begin_inset space ~
22367 \begin_layout Subsection
22368 Navigating in Formulas
22369 \begin_inset Index idx
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 \begin_layout Standard
22382 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22383 achieved with the arrow keys.
22384 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22385 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22390 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22391 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22395 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22399 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22402 \end{array}\right]$
22410 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22415 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22416 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22419 \begin_layout Standard
22424 , printed in this document as
22425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22429 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22436 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22437 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22438 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22443 For example, if you want
22444 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22452 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22462 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22466 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22471 , since in the latter case only the
22474 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22479 will be under the square root sign:
22480 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22486 \begin_layout Standard
22487 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22489 \begin_inset Formula
22491 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22500 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22501 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22504 \begin_layout Subsection
22508 \begin_layout Standard
22509 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22510 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22514 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22515 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22516 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22517 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22518 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22521 \begin_layout Subsection
22522 Exponents and Subscripts
22523 \begin_inset Index idx
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22533 \begin_inset Index idx
22536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 \begin_layout Standard
22546 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22549 arg "math-superscript"
22555 arg "math-subscript"
22558 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22560 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22563 , type in a formula
22566 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22576 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22582 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22586 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22592 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22598 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22607 , you have to use an extra
22611 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22612 For example, if you want
22613 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22619 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22625 Subscripts are similar: To get
22626 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22632 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22640 \begin_layout Subsection
22642 \begin_inset Index idx
22645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 \begin_layout Standard
22655 Create a fraction either with the command
22661 or by using the icon
22664 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22670 \begin_inset space ~
22676 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22677 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22678 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22683 To move back up, press
22688 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22689 \begin_inset Formula
22691 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22694 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22702 \begin_layout Subsection
22704 \begin_inset Index idx
22707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 \begin_layout Standard
22717 Roots can be created using the
22720 \begin_inset space ~
22728 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22734 arg "math-insert \\root"
22756 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22762 always produces a square root.
22765 \begin_layout Subsection
22766 Operators with Limits
22767 \begin_inset Index idx
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22777 \begin_inset Index idx
22780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22789 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22796 \begin_layout Standard
22798 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22802 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22805 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22806 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22807 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22808 The sum operator will automatically place its
22809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22816 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22818 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22822 \begin_inset Formula
22824 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22829 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22833 \begin_layout Standard
22834 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22836 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22837 behind the operator and using the menu
22839 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22840 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22842 \begin_inset space ~
22846 \begin_inset space ~
22860 \begin_layout Standard
22861 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22870 \begin_inset Index idx
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 \begin_inset Formula
22882 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22887 which will place the
22888 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22900 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22901 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22907 \begin_layout Standard
22908 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22915 Have a look at section
22916 \begin_inset space ~
22920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22922 reference "sub:Functions"
22926 for an explanation of function macros.
22929 \begin_layout Subsection
22931 \begin_inset Index idx
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 \begin_layout Standard
22944 Most math symbols can be found in the
22947 \begin_inset space ~
22952 under one of several categories; including
22969 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22973 \begin_layout Standard
22974 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22975 you don't have to use the
22978 \begin_inset space ~
22983 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22984 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22987 \begin_layout Subsection
22989 \begin_inset Index idx
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 \begin_layout Standard
23002 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23007 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23013 \begin_inset space ~
23023 arg "math-insert \\space"
23029 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23030 For example, the sequence
23035 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23039 \begin_inset Graphics
23040 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23045 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23046 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23047 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23048 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23050 Here are two examples:
23053 \begin_layout Standard
23063 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23069 \begin_layout Standard
23079 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23085 \begin_layout Subsection
23087 \begin_inset Index idx
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23099 name "sub:Functions"
23106 \begin_layout Standard
23110 \begin_inset space ~
23115 contains under the button
23120 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23125 a number of function macros, such as
23126 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23130 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23138 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23145 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23146 avoid confusions, because
23147 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23151 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23157 \begin_layout Standard
23158 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23160 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23164 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23170 \begin_layout Standard
23171 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23172 are placed, as described in section
23173 \begin_inset space ~
23177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23179 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23186 \begin_layout Subsection
23188 \begin_inset Index idx
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 \begin_layout Standard
23201 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23203 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23204 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23205 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23208 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23209 Our example is entered by typing
23214 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23221 \begin_inset space ~
23225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23227 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23231 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23234 \begin_layout Standard
23235 \begin_inset Float table
23240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23246 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23250 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 \begin_inset Tabular
23261 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23262 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23263 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23264 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23265 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23565 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23673 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23727 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23847 \begin_layout Standard
23848 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23851 \begin_inset space ~
23859 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23862 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23866 \begin_layout Section
23867 Brackets and Delimiters
23868 \begin_inset Index idx
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23878 \begin_inset Index idx
23881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23890 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23897 \begin_layout Standard
23898 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23899 For some purposes, using just the keys
23904 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23905 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23906 toolbar delimiter icon
23909 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23913 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23914 \begin_inset Formula
23916 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23924 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23925 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23929 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23932 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23938 \begin_inset Formula
23940 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23948 \begin_layout Standard
23949 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23950 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23954 \begin_layout Standard
23955 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23956 left side and right side.
23957 If you use the option
23960 \begin_inset space ~
23965 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23966 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
23967 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
23972 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23975 \begin_layout Standard
23976 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
23977 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
23978 is to go inside the brackets.
23979 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23984 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23985 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23986 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
23990 arg "math-delim ( )"
23996 \begin_layout Section
23997 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23998 \begin_inset Index idx
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 \begin_inset Index idx
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 \begin_inset Index idx
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24022 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24030 \begin_layout Standard
24031 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24034 \begin_inset space ~
24044 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24050 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24051 Here is an example:
24052 \begin_inset Formula
24054 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24063 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24064 \begin_inset space ~
24068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24070 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24075 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24076 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24077 This alignment is set in the box
24082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24130 for every column as default.
24131 For example, the sequence
24132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24143 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24144 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24145 corresponds to the relevant column.
24146 The result will look like this:
24147 \begin_inset Formula
24150 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24151 column & has & has\, right\\
24152 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24161 \begin_layout Standard
24162 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24165 arg "newline-insert newline"
24168 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24169 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24171 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24174 or the math toolbar.
24177 \begin_layout Standard
24178 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24179 It can be created with the menu
24181 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24182 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24184 \begin_inset space ~
24196 Here is an example:
24197 \begin_inset Formula
24211 \begin_layout Standard
24212 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24215 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24218 arg "newline-insert newline"
24222 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24227 arg "newline-insert newline"
24230 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24238 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24239 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24240 A new row is created by every further entry of
24243 arg "newline-insert newline"
24247 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24248 Here is an example:
24249 \begin_inset Formula
24251 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24252 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24257 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24258 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24259 \begin_inset Formula
24261 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24269 \begin_layout Standard
24270 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24277 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24278 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24281 reference "eq:asquared"
24286 The other types are described in section
24287 \begin_inset space ~
24291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24293 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24300 \begin_layout Section
24301 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24302 \begin_inset Index idx
24305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 Math ! Formula numbering
24312 \begin_inset Index idx
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24316 Math ! Referencing formulas
24322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24324 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24331 \begin_layout Standard
24332 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24334 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24335 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24337 \begin_inset space ~
24341 \begin_inset space ~
24349 arg "math-number-toggle"
24353 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24354 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24355 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24356 the document class.
24357 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24358 separated by a dot:
24359 \begin_inset Formula
24369 arg "math-number-toggle"
24372 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24373 You can only number displayed formulas.
24376 \begin_layout Standard
24377 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24379 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24380 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24382 \begin_inset space ~
24386 \begin_inset space ~
24394 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24397 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24398 \begin_inset Formula
24401 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24407 To number all lines use the shortcut
24410 arg "math-number-toggle"
24416 \begin_layout Standard
24417 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24420 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24421 A label is inserted with the menu
24423 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24432 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24433 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24434 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24446 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24447 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24448 We inserted in the following example the label
24449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24456 in the second line:
24457 \begin_inset Formula
24459 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24460 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24465 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24466 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24467 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24469 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24471 \begin_inset space ~
24479 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24483 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24484 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24485 as the formula number:
24488 \begin_layout Standard
24489 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24492 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24499 \begin_layout Standard
24500 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24501 \begin_inset space ~
24505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24507 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24512 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24520 \begin_layout Section
24521 User defined math macros
24522 \begin_inset Index idx
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 \begin_layout Standard
24535 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24536 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24537 Math macros are explained in section
24540 \begin_inset space ~
24552 \begin_layout Section
24556 \begin_layout Subsection
24558 \begin_inset Index idx
24561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 \begin_layout Standard
24571 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24572 To set a font in a formula, use the
24575 \begin_inset space ~
24585 arg "math-insert \\font"
24590 , or enter its command, listed in table
24591 \begin_inset space ~
24595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24597 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24604 \begin_layout Standard
24605 \begin_inset Float table
24610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24611 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24616 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24620 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24630 \begin_inset Tabular
24631 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24632 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24633 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24634 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24666 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24693 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24720 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24753 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24780 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24807 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24841 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24868 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 \begin_layout Standard
24903 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24911 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24927 \begin_layout Standard
24928 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24929 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24934 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24935 space when you need a space in the box.
24936 Here is an example where
24937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24948 denotes the set of numbers:
24949 \begin_inset Formula
24951 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24959 \begin_layout Standard
24960 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24961 You can, for example, put a character in
24970 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24974 \begin_inset Newline newline
24977 So it is better not to use this feature.
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24981 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24982 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24986 \begin_inset Newline newline
24989 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24995 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24996 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25002 \begin_layout Standard
25009 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25012 \begin_layout Standard
25013 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25015 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25016 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25018 \begin_inset space ~
25026 \begin_layout Subsection
25028 \begin_inset Index idx
25031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25040 \begin_layout Standard
25041 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25043 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25047 \begin_inset space ~
25051 \begin_inset space ~
25059 \begin_inset space ~
25069 arg "math-insert \\font"
25081 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25082 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25083 Here is an example:
25084 \begin_inset Formula
25087 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25088 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25097 \begin_layout Subsection
25099 \begin_inset Index idx
25102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25111 \begin_layout Standard
25112 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25113 automatically chosen in most situations.
25131 For most characters,
25139 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25140 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25145 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25146 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25148 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25153 arg "math-insert \\style"
25159 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25160 For example, you can set
25161 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25164 , which is normally in
25173 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25177 The four styles are used in the following example:
25180 \begin_layout Standard
25181 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25185 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25189 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25193 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25199 \begin_layout Standard
25200 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25201 is set in a particular size with the menu
25203 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25205 \begin_inset space ~
25210 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25211 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25212 will be adjusted to correspond.
25213 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25224 \begin_layout Standard
25228 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25234 \begin_layout Section
25236 \begin_inset Index idx
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 \begin_inset Index idx
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25258 \begin_layout Standard
25259 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25260 (AMS) that are in common use.
25263 \begin_layout Subsection
25264 Enabling AMS-Support
25267 \begin_layout Standard
25268 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25269 the document by selecting the checkbox
25272 \begin_inset space ~
25276 \begin_inset space ~
25280 \begin_inset space ~
25287 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25291 \begin_inset Index idx
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25295 Document ! Settings
25303 \begin_inset space ~
25309 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25310 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25313 \begin_layout Subsection
25315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25317 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25322 \begin_inset Index idx
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25334 \begin_layout Standard
25335 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25336 LyX allows you to choose between
25357 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25364 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25367 \begin_layout Chapter
25371 \begin_layout Section
25373 \begin_inset Index idx
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25385 name "sec:Cross-References"
25392 \begin_layout Standard
25393 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25394 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25396 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25397 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25398 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25401 \begin_layout Enumerate
25405 \begin_layout Enumerate
25406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25408 name "enu:Second-item"
25415 \begin_layout Enumerate
25419 \begin_layout Standard
25420 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25422 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25425 or by pressing the toolbar button
25432 A gray label box like this:
25433 \begin_inset Graphics
25434 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25439 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25440 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25475 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25476 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25492 \begin_layout Standard
25493 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25495 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25498 or the toolbar button
25501 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25505 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25506 \begin_inset Graphics
25507 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25512 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25514 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25527 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25531 \begin_layout Standard
25532 As an alternative to
25534 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25537 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25542 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25543 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25545 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25557 \begin_layout Standard
25558 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25559 \begin_inset space ~
25563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25565 reference "enu:Second-item"
25572 \begin_layout Standard
25573 It is recommended to use a protected space
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25578 described in section
25579 \begin_inset space ~
25583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25585 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25594 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25595 line breaks between them.
25598 \begin_layout Standard
25599 There are six formats of cross-references:
25602 \begin_layout Description
25603 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25606 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25613 \begin_layout Description
25614 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25615 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25627 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25634 \begin_layout Description
25635 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25636 \begin_inset space ~
25640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25641 LatexCommand pageref
25642 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25649 \begin_layout Description
25651 \begin_inset space ~
25655 \begin_inset space ~
25658 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25660 LatexCommand vpageref
25661 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25666 \begin_inset Newline newline
25669 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25670 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25671 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25672 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25673 it prints “on the next page”.
25674 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25677 \begin_layout Description
25679 \begin_inset space ~
25683 \begin_inset space ~
25687 \begin_inset space ~
25690 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25693 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25698 \begin_inset Newline newline
25701 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25707 ; otherwise it behaves like
25711 \begin_inset space ~
25715 \begin_inset space ~
25724 \begin_layout Description
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25729 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25730 \begin_inset Newline newline
25734 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25742 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25751 \begin_inset Index idx
25754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25755 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25761 \begin_inset Index idx
25764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25765 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25776 \begin_inset Newline newline
25779 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25782 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25786 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25787 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25795 is the default and preferred because
25799 supports only English documents.
25800 The format is specified by using the command
25812 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25813 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25826 ) can be done with this command
25827 \begin_inset Newline newline
25834 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25839 \begin_inset Newline newline
25842 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25844 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25846 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25853 \begin_layout Description
25855 \begin_inset space ~
25858 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25860 LatexCommand nameref
25861 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25868 \begin_layout Standard
25869 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25870 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25871 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25875 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25879 \begin_layout Standard
25880 You can only use the style
25884 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25888 is always possible.
25891 \begin_layout Standard
25892 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25893 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25895 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25896 \begin_inset space ~
25900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25902 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25909 \begin_layout Standard
25910 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25914 \begin_inset space ~
25918 \begin_inset space ~
25923 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25924 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25927 \begin_inset space ~
25932 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25933 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25936 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25942 \begin_layout Standard
25943 You can change labels at any time.
25944 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25945 do not need to think about this.
25948 \begin_layout Standard
25949 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
25950 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
25951 instead of the reference.
25954 \begin_layout Standard
25955 References are described in detail in the section
25956 \begin_inset space ~
25960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25970 \begin_inset space ~
25978 \begin_layout Section
25979 Table of Contents and other Listings
25980 \begin_inset Index idx
25983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25990 \begin_inset Index idx
25993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26009 \begin_layout Subsection
26011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26013 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26020 \begin_layout Standard
26021 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26023 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26024 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26026 \begin_inset space ~
26030 \begin_inset space ~
26036 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26037 If you click on it, the
26041 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26042 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26043 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26045 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26047 \begin_inset space ~
26052 that is described in section
26053 \begin_inset space ~
26057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26059 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26066 \begin_layout Standard
26067 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26068 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26070 \begin_inset space ~
26074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26076 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26080 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26082 \begin_inset space ~
26086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26088 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26092 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26094 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26097 \begin_layout Subsection
26098 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26101 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26108 \begin_layout Standard
26109 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26110 You can insert them via the
26112 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26116 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26119 \begin_layout Section
26120 URLs and Hyperlinks
26121 \begin_inset Index idx
26124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26131 \begin_inset Index idx
26134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26143 \begin_layout Subsection
26145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26154 \begin_layout Standard
26155 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26157 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26163 \begin_layout Standard
26164 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26165 \begin_inset Flex URL
26168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26178 \begin_layout Standard
26179 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26185 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26189 \begin_layout Standard
26190 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26198 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26206 \begin_layout Subsection
26208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26210 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26217 \begin_layout Standard
26218 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26220 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26223 or with the toolbar button
26230 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26239 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26240 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26241 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26243 name "LyX's homepage"
26244 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26248 , an Email address like this:
26249 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26251 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26252 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26257 , or a link to a file.
26260 \begin_layout Standard
26261 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26274 to the link target.
26277 \begin_layout Standard
26278 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26279 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26280 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26281 the text style dialog.
26282 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26286 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26288 name "LyX's homepage"
26289 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26296 \begin_layout Standard
26297 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26301 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26303 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26304 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26308 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26310 \begin_inset Newline newline
26318 \begin_inset Newline newline
26325 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26328 \begin_layout Section
26330 \begin_inset Index idx
26333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26342 name "sec:Appendices"
26349 \begin_layout Standard
26350 Appendices are created with the menu
26352 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26354 \begin_inset space ~
26358 \begin_inset space ~
26364 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26365 as the appendix part of the book.
26366 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26369 \begin_layout Standard
26370 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26371 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26372 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26373 and the subsection number.
26374 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26378 \begin_layout Standard
26380 \begin_inset space ~
26384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26386 reference "chap:Credits"
26391 \begin_inset space ~
26395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26397 reference "sub:Export"
26404 \begin_layout Section
26406 \begin_inset Index idx
26409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26418 name "sec:Bibliography"
26425 \begin_layout Standard
26426 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26427 You can include a bibliography database,
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26432 Known under the name
26433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26445 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26446 manually, using the paragraph environment
26450 , which was described in section
26451 \begin_inset space ~
26455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26457 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26462 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26463 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26467 use a bibliography database.
26470 \begin_layout Subsection
26471 The Bibliography Environment
26474 \begin_layout Standard
26479 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26481 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26490 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26492 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26501 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26504 \begin_layout Standard
26505 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26507 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26510 or the toolbar button
26513 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26517 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26518 containing the available citations.
26519 Select one or more keys from the list and
26529 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26530 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26534 \begin_layout Standard
26535 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26536 entry with surrounding brackets.
26541 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26542 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26557 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26562 key "latexcompanion"
26569 \begin_layout Standard
26570 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26571 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26580 \begin_layout Standard
26581 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26584 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26586 \begin_inset space ~
26594 arg "layout-paragraph"
26598 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26601 \begin_layout Subsection
26602 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26603 \begin_inset Index idx
26606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26607 Bibliography ! Databases
26613 \begin_inset Index idx
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26617 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26625 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26632 \begin_layout Standard
26633 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26639 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26641 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26642 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26647 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26649 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26650 your working field in a database.
26651 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26652 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26653 list for that document.
26654 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26658 \begin_layout Standard
26659 The database is a text file with the file extension
26660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26671 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26672 The format is explained in
26673 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26679 and in the LaTeX books (
26680 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26682 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26687 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26688 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26689 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26690 \begin_inset Flex URL
26693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26695 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26703 \begin_layout Standard
26704 To use a database, use the menu
26706 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26711 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26724 \begin_inset space ~
26730 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26731 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26738 Add bibliography to TOC
26740 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26745 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26746 in the document or just the cited references.
26749 \begin_layout Standard
26750 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26762 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26763 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26764 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26766 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26772 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26773 \begin_inset Newline newline
26777 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26779 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26791 \begin_layout Standard
26792 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26795 \begin_layout Standard
26796 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26797 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26803 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26804 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26809 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26810 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26811 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26826 The following variants are possible:
26829 \begin_layout Description
26830 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26831 with other bibliography packages (e.
26832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26836 \begin_inset space \space{}
26843 ), only with the package
26847 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26851 \begin_layout Description
26852 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26853 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26854 with all bibliography packages, except
26859 \begin_layout Description
26860 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26865 , works with all bibliography packages
26868 \begin_layout Standard
26869 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26871 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26877 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26886 \begin_layout Standard
26887 When you select the option
26889 Sectioned bibliography
26893 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26894 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26897 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26898 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26900 Customizing Bibliographies
26908 Additional Features
26913 \begin_layout Standard
26914 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26915 the two methods of creating them.
26916 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26917 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26918 We used the style file
26922 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26925 \begin_layout Subsection
26926 Bibliography layout
26927 \begin_inset Index idx
26930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26931 Bibliography ! Layout
26939 \begin_layout Standard
26940 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26941 For this feature you need to enable the option
26947 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26951 \begin_inset Index idx
26954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26955 Document ! Settings
26965 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26966 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26967 in the previous section.
26970 \begin_layout Standard
26971 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26972 the citation reference window.
26973 Here is an example where the text
26974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26978 \begin_inset space ~
26982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26985 appears after the reference:
26988 \begin_layout Standard
26990 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26993 key "latexcompanion"
27000 \begin_layout Section
27002 \begin_inset Index idx
27005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27021 \begin_layout Standard
27022 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27024 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27026 \begin_inset space ~
27031 or the toolbar button
27038 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27039 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27040 by LyX as the index entry.
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27046 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27047 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27049 \begin_inset space ~
27055 A light blue box labeled
27056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27067 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27068 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27071 \begin_layout Standard
27072 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27073 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27075 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27077 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27084 \begin_layout Subsection
27085 Grouping Index Entries
27086 \begin_inset Index idx
27089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27098 \begin_layout Standard
27099 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27101 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27102 lists under the entry
27103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27111 First we create the entry
27112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27120 \begin_inset space ~
27124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27126 reference "sub:Lists"
27131 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27132 \begin_inset space ~
27136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27138 reference "sec:Itemize"
27142 , we insert the command
27145 \begin_layout Standard
27151 \begin_layout Standard
27155 \begin_layout Standard
27161 \begin_layout Standard
27162 for the enumerated list in section
27163 \begin_inset space ~
27167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27169 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27176 \begin_layout Standard
27177 The exclamation mark
27178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27185 marks the grouping levels.
27186 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27187 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27188 If we don't have an index entry for
27189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27196 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27199 \begin_layout Subsection
27201 \begin_inset Index idx
27204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27205 Index ! Page ranges
27213 \begin_layout Standard
27214 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27216 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27217 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27218 an index entry in section
27219 \begin_inset space ~
27223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27225 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27232 \begin_layout Standard
27235 Paragraph environments|(
27238 \begin_layout Standard
27239 and another entry at the end of section
27240 \begin_inset space ~
27244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27246 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27256 Paragraph environments|)
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27284 respectively start and end the index range.
27285 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27286 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27287 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27288 An example is the index entry
27289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27292 Document ! Settings
27293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27299 \begin_layout Subsection
27301 \begin_inset Index idx
27304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27305 Index ! Cross referencing
27313 \begin_layout Standard
27314 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27315 We referred for example in the index entry
27316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27324 \begin_inset space ~
27328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27330 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27334 ) to the index entry
27335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27342 in the same section using the entry
27345 \begin_layout Standard
27348 GIF|see{Image formats}
27351 \begin_layout Standard
27352 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27353 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27354 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27357 \begin_layout Subsection
27359 \begin_inset Index idx
27362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27363 Index ! Entry order
27371 \begin_layout Standard
27372 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27373 follow the rules for the index order.
27374 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27379 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27381 \begin_inset space ~
27385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27387 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27396 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27397 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27422 \begin_inset Index idx
27425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27426 Dummy entries ! maïs
27432 \begin_inset Index idx
27435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27436 Dummy entries ! maître
27442 \begin_inset Index idx
27445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27446 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27451 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27452 maïs, maison, maître.
27453 To achieve this, we use the command
27456 \begin_layout Standard
27459 previous entry@current entry
27462 \begin_layout Standard
27463 In our case we want to have
27464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27479 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27482 \begin_layout Standard
27488 \begin_layout Standard
27489 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27490 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27491 See the next subsection for an example.
27494 \begin_layout Standard
27495 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27501 \begin_layout Standard
27502 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27507 to generate the index (see sec.
27508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27514 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27523 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27531 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27535 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27536 index commands start with
27537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27549 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27554 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27557 \begin_layout Standard
27569 \begin_layout Standard
27581 \begin_layout Subsection
27583 \begin_inset Index idx
27586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27587 Index ! Entry layout
27595 \begin_layout Standard
27596 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27597 \begin_inset Index idx
27600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27603 This is an italic dummy entry
27608 You can also format the page number using the character
27609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27616 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27617 We can write for example
27620 \begin_layout Standard
27623 italic page number:|textit
27626 \begin_layout Standard
27627 to get the page number in italic.
27628 \begin_inset Index idx
27631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27637 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27655 \begin_inset space ~
27661 Have a look at section
27662 \begin_inset space ~
27666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27668 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27672 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27675 \begin_layout Standard
27676 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27684 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27688 to generate the index, see sec.
27689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27695 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27704 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27709 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27710 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27713 key "latexcompanion"
27725 \begin_layout Standard
27726 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27728 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27729 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27730 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27731 If so, put the following in the preamble
27734 \begin_layout Standard
27746 \begin_layout Standard
27750 \begin_layout Standard
27756 \begin_layout Standard
27757 in the index entry.
27758 \begin_inset Index idx
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27762 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27767 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27768 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27769 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27772 \begin_layout Standard
27773 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27774 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27775 a bold font for all index entries.
27776 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27788 documentation for details,
27789 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27791 key "makeindex,xindy"
27798 \begin_layout Subsection
27800 \begin_inset Index idx
27803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27812 name "sub:Index-Program"
27819 \begin_layout Standard
27820 If the index generation program
27824 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27828 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27837 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27838 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27839 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27840 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27841 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27851 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27852 dialog, see section
27853 \begin_inset space ~
27857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27859 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27864 The available options are listed and explained in
27865 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27867 key "makeindex,xindy"
27872 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27876 \begin_layout Standard
27877 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27878 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27881 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27882 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27886 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27887 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27890 \begin_layout Subsection
27894 \begin_layout Standard
27895 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27896 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27904 next to the standard index.
27905 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27906 that add this feature.
27912 \begin_inset Index idx
27915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27916 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27921 package to generate multiple indexes.
27922 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
27928 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27935 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27936 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27937 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27945 \begin_layout Standard
27946 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27948 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27949 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27952 and select the option
27954 Use multiple Indexes
27961 already contains the standard index
27962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27970 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27971 also appear as a heading) to the
27975 input field and press the
27980 The new index now also appears in the list.
27981 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
27985 \begin_layout Standard
27986 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27989 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27996 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
27997 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27998 are additional features:
28001 \begin_layout Itemize
28002 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28003 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28006 \begin_layout Itemize
28007 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28008 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28016 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28017 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28018 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28019 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28022 \begin_layout Section
28023 Nomenclature/Glossary
28024 \begin_inset Index idx
28027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28034 \begin_inset Index idx
28037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28068 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28075 \begin_layout Standard
28076 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28077 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28078 called nomenclature or glossary.
28081 \begin_layout Standard
28082 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28088 \begin_inset Index idx
28091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28092 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28098 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28099 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28105 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28109 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28110 and then use the menu
28112 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28118 \begin_inset space ~
28123 or the toolbar button
28126 arg "nomencl-insert"
28131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28142 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28146 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28147 The first is the term or
28151 that you wish to define.
28156 of the term or symbol.
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28160 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28168 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28176 \begin_layout Subsection
28177 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28178 \begin_inset Index idx
28181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28182 Nomenclature ! Layout
28190 \begin_layout Standard
28191 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28195 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28201 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28209 \begin_inset Newline newline
28217 \begin_inset Newline newline
28223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28230 character starts/ends the formula.
28231 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28243 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28253 \begin_layout Standard
28254 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28255 \begin_inset space ~
28259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28261 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28268 \begin_layout Standard
28272 \begin_inset space ~
28277 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28278 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28283 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28290 in this document is:
28291 \begin_inset Newline newline
28296 dummy entry for the character
28301 \begin_inset Newline newline
28313 \begin_inset space ~
28323 font use the command
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 If the characters |
28354 \begin_inset space \space{}
28358 \begin_inset space \space{}
28362 \begin_inset space \space{}
28366 \begin_inset space \space{}
28370 \begin_inset space \space{}
28373 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28374 a quote character in front of them.
28375 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28376 LatexCommand nomenclature
28377 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28378 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28385 \begin_layout Subsection
28386 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28387 \begin_inset Index idx
28390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28391 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28399 \begin_layout Standard
28400 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28401 the symbol definition.
28402 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28404 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28407 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28408 LatexCommand nomenclature
28410 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28417 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28421 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28422 LatexCommand nomenclature
28425 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28430 They will be sorted by
28431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28457 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28460 will be sorted before the
28464 since the character
28465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28472 is considered in sorting.
28475 \begin_layout Standard
28476 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28479 \begin_inset space ~
28484 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28485 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28487 For the example given, you can insert
28491 in this field for the
28492 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28499 will be located before
28500 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28506 \begin_layout Standard
28507 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28521 \begin_layout Subsection
28522 Nomenclature Options
28523 \begin_inset Index idx
28526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28527 Nomenclature ! Options
28535 \begin_layout Standard
28540 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28541 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28544 \begin_layout Description
28545 refeq Appends the phrase
28546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28561 to every nomenclature entry, where
28567 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28570 \begin_layout Description
28571 refpage Appends the phrase
28572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28587 to every nomenclature entry, where
28593 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28596 \begin_layout Description
28597 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28600 \begin_layout Standard
28601 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28602 class options list in the
28604 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28608 In this document the options
28615 \begin_layout Standard
28616 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28622 \begin_layout Standard
28623 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28624 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28629 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28632 \begin_layout Description
28642 \begin_layout Description
28645 nomrefpage Like the
28652 \begin_layout Description
28655 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28664 \begin_layout Description
28668 \begin_inset space ~
28674 \begin_inset space ~
28679 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28682 \begin_layout Standard
28684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28691 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28692 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28695 \begin_layout Standard
28703 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28706 \begin_inset Newline newline
28713 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28718 \begin_inset Newline newline
28722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28737 by their translation.
28740 \begin_layout Subsection
28741 Printing the Nomenclature
28742 \begin_inset Index idx
28745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28746 Nomenclature ! Printing
28754 \begin_layout Standard
28755 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28757 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28758 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28774 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28775 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28776 You can choose between these settings:
28779 \begin_layout Description
28780 Default a space of 1
28781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28787 \begin_layout Description
28789 \begin_inset space ~
28793 \begin_inset space ~
28796 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28799 \begin_layout Description
28800 Custom custom space
28803 \begin_layout Standard
28804 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28813 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28821 For example, in order to change the name to
28825 , add the following line to the preamble:
28828 \begin_layout Standard
28836 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28839 \begin_layout Subsection
28840 Nomenclature Program
28841 \begin_inset Index idx
28844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28845 Nomenclature ! Program
28851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28853 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28860 \begin_layout Standard
28861 LyX uses the program
28865 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28866 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28871 by adding options, see section
28872 \begin_inset space ~
28876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28878 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28883 The available options are listed and explained in
28884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28886 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28893 \begin_layout Section
28895 \begin_inset Index idx
28898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28905 \begin_inset Index idx
28908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28909 Document ! Branches
28915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28917 name "sec:Branches"
28924 \begin_layout Standard
28925 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28926 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28927 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28928 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28931 \begin_layout Standard
28932 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28933 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28934 To create a branch, either select the menu
28936 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28937 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28940 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28942 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28949 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28950 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28951 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28952 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28953 (see below for an example).
28954 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28955 to the name of the other) and to add
28956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28968 \begin_inset space ~
28971 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28972 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28975 \begin_layout Standard
28976 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28977 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28979 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28982 where you can choose a branch.
28983 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28987 \begin_layout Standard
28988 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28989 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28992 \begin_layout Standard
28993 \begin_inset Branch Question
28996 \begin_layout Standard
28997 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29005 \begin_layout Standard
29006 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29009 \begin_layout Standard
29010 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29018 \begin_layout Standard
29025 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29026 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29029 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29030 Consider for example a file
29031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29038 which has the above branches.
29040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29047 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29071 branch were inactive,
29072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29087 branch was active, likewise
29088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29103 branch was active, and
29104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29107 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29111 if both branches were active.
29112 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29115 \begin_layout Standard
29116 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29122 \begin_layout Standard
29123 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29124 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29126 For example you can define for the question branch
29130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29131 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29132 \begin_inset space ~
29136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29138 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29150 \begin_layout Standard
29160 \begin_layout Standard
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29171 and for the answer branch
29174 \begin_layout Standard
29184 \begin_layout Standard
29194 \begin_layout Standard
29195 \begin_inset Branch Question
29198 \begin_layout Standard
29202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29230 \begin_layout Standard
29231 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29234 \begin_layout Standard
29238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29266 \begin_layout Standard
29267 Now it is possible to use the
29271 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29278 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29281 commands to obtain conditional output.
29282 Here is an example formula where only the
29289 \begin_inset Formula
29291 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29299 \begin_layout Standard
29300 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29308 \begin_layout Standard
29309 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29315 \begin_inset space \space{}
29318 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29319 For this advanced usage, see the
29324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29327 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29334 \begin_layout Section
29336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29338 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29343 \begin_inset Index idx
29346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29355 \begin_layout Standard
29358 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29359 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29362 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29364 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29369 \begin_inset Index idx
29372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29373 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29378 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29379 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29380 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29381 part of the document.
29385 \begin_layout Standard
29386 The header information in the dialog tab
29390 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29391 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29392 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29393 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29397 \begin_inset space ~
29401 \begin_inset space ~
29406 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29407 title and author entries.
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29415 \begin_inset space ~
29419 \begin_inset space ~
29424 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29427 \begin_layout Standard
29428 You can specify in the dialog tab
29432 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29437 \begin_inset space ~
29441 \begin_inset space ~
29445 \begin_inset space ~
29450 option allows long links to be split;
29453 \begin_inset space ~
29457 \begin_inset space ~
29461 \begin_inset space ~
29469 \begin_inset space ~
29474 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29477 \begin_inset space ~
29482 colors the different links.
29483 The default colors are:
29486 \begin_layout Labeling
29487 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29492 for hyperlinks and URLs
29495 \begin_layout Labeling
29496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29504 \begin_layout Labeling
29505 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29513 \begin_layout Standard
29514 but you can change these in the field
29519 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29522 \begin_layout Standard
29525 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29528 \begin_layout Standard
29533 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29534 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29535 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29538 \begin_layout Standard
29543 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29544 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29545 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29555 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29556 when opening the PDF.
29558 \begin_inset space ~
29561 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29562 \begin_inset space ~
29565 1 will only display the sections.
29568 \begin_layout Standard
29569 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29570 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29576 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29577 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29586 \begin_layout Section
29587 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29590 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29597 \begin_layout Subsection
29599 \begin_inset Index idx
29602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29611 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29618 \begin_layout Standard
29619 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29620 constructs, but not all.
29621 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29622 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29623 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29624 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29625 and their commands.
29628 \begin_layout Standard
29629 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29631 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29633 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29646 \begin_inset space ~
29651 or by the toolbar button
29664 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29672 \begin_layout Standard
29673 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29674 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29675 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29676 using the LaTeX-command
29682 , you can write the command part
29688 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29692 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29693 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29694 the following example:
29697 \begin_layout Standard
29698 \begin_inset Graphics
29699 filename clipart/ERT.png
29707 \begin_layout Standard
29711 \begin_layout Standard
29712 This is a line with a
29716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29748 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29749 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29757 \begin_layout Subsection
29758 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29759 \begin_inset Argument 1
29762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29769 \begin_inset Index idx
29772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29781 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29789 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29790 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29791 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29800 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29801 any time if you know the right commands.
29802 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29803 is the end of the day.
29804 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29805 all caption labels bold.
29806 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29808 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29812 \begin_layout Standard
29813 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29814 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29815 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
29817 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29826 \begin_layout Standard
29827 As result you find that the package
29832 \begin_inset Index idx
29835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29836 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29842 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29844 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29847 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
29854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29862 \begin_inset space ~
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29875 usepackage[options]{package name}
29878 \begin_layout Standard
29879 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29880 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29881 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29884 \begin_layout Standard
29885 In your case the package name is
29890 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29895 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29896 So you add the command
29899 \begin_layout Standard
29904 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29907 \begin_layout Standard
29908 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29913 For more commands provided by the
29917 package, have a look at its documentation,
29918 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29935 For example if you use a
29939 class, you don't need the package
29943 , you can instead write
29946 \begin_layout Standard
29951 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29956 \begin_layout Standard
29957 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29958 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29959 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29966 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29969 \begin_layout Standard
29970 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29971 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29973 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29974 the previous section.
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29978 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29980 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29982 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29990 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29996 \begin_layout Standard
30000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30010 \begin_inset Note Note
30013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30014 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30022 \begin_layout Left Header
30023 \begin_inset Argument 1
30026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30046 \begin_inset Note Note
30049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30050 defines the header line as described below
30058 \begin_layout Center Header
30059 \begin_inset Argument 1
30062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30071 \begin_layout Right Header
30072 \begin_inset Argument 1
30075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30096 \begin_layout Left Footer
30097 \begin_inset Argument 1
30100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30121 \begin_layout Center Footer
30122 \begin_inset Argument 1
30125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30136 \begin_inset Newline newline
30140 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30146 \begin_layout Right Footer
30147 \begin_inset Argument 1
30150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30172 \begin_layout Section
30173 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30176 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30181 \begin_inset Index idx
30184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30185 Document ! Header/Footer line
30191 \begin_inset Index idx
30194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30208 \begin_inset space ~
30219 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30225 \begin_inset space ~
30231 As a second step add in the menu
30233 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30234 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30241 Custom Header/Footerlines
30242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30246 This module offers the following 6
30247 \begin_inset space ~
30253 \begin_layout Description
30255 \begin_inset space ~
30259 \begin_inset space ~
30263 \begin_inset space ~
30267 \begin_inset space ~
30271 \begin_inset space ~
30277 \begin_layout Description
30279 \begin_inset space ~
30283 \begin_inset space ~
30287 \begin_inset space ~
30291 \begin_inset space ~
30295 \begin_inset space ~
30301 \begin_layout Standard
30302 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30305 \begin_layout Standard
30306 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30307 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30309 \begin_inset space ~
30313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30315 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30319 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30322 \begin_layout Standard
30323 \begin_inset Float figure
30329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30332 \begin_inset Tabular
30333 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30334 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30335 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30336 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30337 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30357 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30386 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30397 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30401 The normal text on the page goes here.
30402 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30404 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30405 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30410 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30419 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30430 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30448 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30459 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30477 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30495 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30500 name "fig:Page-layout"
30504 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30526 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30530 \begin_inset space ~
30535 is set to “Default”.
30536 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30545 \begin_layout Subsection
30549 \begin_layout Standard
30550 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30551 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30552 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30553 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30555 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30556 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30560 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30563 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30576 \begin_inset space ~
30584 \begin_layout Description
30587 thepage prints the current page number
30590 \begin_layout Description
30593 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30596 \begin_layout Description
30599 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30602 \begin_layout Description
30605 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30606 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30613 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30616 because it usually goes in a left header.
30619 \begin_layout Description
30622 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30623 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30625 It is normally used in the right header.
30628 \begin_layout Subsection
30629 Default header/footer
30632 \begin_layout Standard
30633 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30634 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30635 footer has the page number.
30636 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30637 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30638 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30641 \begin_inset space ~
30649 \begin_layout Subsection
30653 \begin_layout Standard
30654 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30655 Some pages are different.
30656 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30657 a new part or chapter in your book.
30658 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30659 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30660 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30664 Header and footer decoration line
30667 \begin_layout Standard
30668 By default, you get a 0.4
30669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30672 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30673 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30685 in the following way:
30688 \begin_layout Standard
30695 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30698 \begin_layout Standard
30699 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30708 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30715 \begin_layout Standard
30716 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30717 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30718 \begin_inset space ~
30722 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30732 Several header/footer lines
30735 \begin_layout Standard
30736 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30737 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30738 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30740 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30754 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30755 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30768 \begin_inset space ~
30776 \begin_layout Standard
30783 headheight}{height}
30786 \begin_layout Standard
30787 where height is a size in standard units.
30788 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30789 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30790 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
30792 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30809 \begin_inset space ~
30814 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30819 \begin_inset Index idx
30822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30823 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30829 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30830 for your header/footer.
30833 \begin_layout Subsection
30837 \begin_layout Standard
30838 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30839 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30840 This example consists of the following definition:
30843 \begin_layout Description
30845 \begin_inset space ~
30854 , empty optional argument
30857 \begin_layout Description
30859 \begin_inset space ~
30862 Header empty, empty optional argument
30865 \begin_layout Description
30867 \begin_inset space ~
30876 in the optional argument
30879 \begin_layout Description
30881 \begin_inset space ~
30890 in the optional argument
30893 \begin_layout Description
30895 \begin_inset space ~
30907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30911 \begin_inset Newline newline
30915 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30922 in the optional argument
30925 \begin_layout Description
30927 \begin_inset space ~
30936 , empty optional argument
30939 \begin_layout Description
30942 headrulewidth set to 2
30943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30949 \begin_layout Standard
30950 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30951 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
30957 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30966 \begin_layout Standard
30967 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30973 \begin_layout Standard
30977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30981 pagestyle{headings}
30987 \begin_inset Note Note
30990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30991 switches back to page style with the default headings
30999 \begin_layout Section
31000 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31003 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31008 \begin_inset Index idx
31011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31018 \begin_inset Index idx
31021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31030 \begin_layout Standard
31031 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31032 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31033 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31036 \begin_layout Subsection
31040 \begin_layout Standard
31041 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31046 \begin_inset Index idx
31049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31050 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31055 (on some systems named simply
31060 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31068 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31069 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31077 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31078 automatically installed together with LyX.
31081 \begin_layout Subsection
31085 \begin_layout Standard
31086 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31087 LaTeX, activate the option
31090 \begin_inset space ~
31097 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31103 \begin_inset space ~
31107 \begin_inset space ~
31110 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31117 \begin_inset space ~
31130 \begin_inset space ~
31135 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31138 \begin_layout Standard
31139 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31143 \begin_inset space ~
31151 \begin_inset space ~
31159 \begin_layout Standard
31160 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31173 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31174 generated by activating the option
31177 \begin_inset space ~
31183 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31191 \begin_layout Subsection
31192 Selected document parts
31195 \begin_layout Standard
31196 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31197 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31198 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31199 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31201 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31205 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31206 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31207 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31210 \begin_layout Standard
31211 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31217 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31228 is explained in section
31230 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31235 \begin_inset space ~
31245 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31246 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31248 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31250 Here is the result:
31253 \begin_layout Standard
31254 \begin_inset Preview
31256 \begin_layout Standard
31261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31265 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31271 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31281 height_special "totalheight"
31284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31309 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31315 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31337 \begin_layout Standard
31338 Previewing works also for colors.
31339 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31357 is explained in section
31364 \begin_inset space ~
31377 \begin_layout Standard
31378 \begin_inset Preview
31380 \begin_layout Standard
31384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31403 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31408 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31427 \begin_layout Standard
31428 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31434 \begin_layout Standard
31435 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31436 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31437 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31439 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31440 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31441 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31442 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31446 \begin_layout Subsection
31450 \begin_layout Standard
31451 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31454 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31456 \begin_inset space ~
31461 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31462 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31464 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31465 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31466 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31467 the source view window.
31472 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31473 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31474 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31477 \begin_layout Section
31478 Advanced Find and Replace
31479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31481 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31486 \begin_inset Index idx
31489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31496 \begin_inset Index idx
31499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31508 \begin_layout Subsection
31512 \begin_layout Standard
31513 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31514 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31515 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31516 The key-features are:
31519 \begin_layout Itemize
31520 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31521 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31522 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31526 \begin_layout Itemize
31527 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31528 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31529 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31530 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31533 \begin_layout Itemize
31534 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31535 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31536 outside of mathematics environments
31539 \begin_layout Itemize
31540 Search may be widened to a specific
31545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31549 \begin_inset space ~
31552 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31553 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31560 \begin_layout Itemize
31561 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31562 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31567 \begin_inset space ~
31570 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31573 \begin_layout Subsection
31577 \begin_layout Standard
31578 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31580 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31593 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31596 ) or the toolbar button
31599 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31605 Advanced Find and Replace
31610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31614 \begin_layout Standard
31619 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31623 \begin_inset space ~
31628 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31631 arg "break-paragraph"
31635 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31636 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31640 arg "break-paragraph"
31643 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31647 searches backwards.
31650 \begin_layout Standard
31654 \begin_inset space ~
31659 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31668 \begin_inset space ~
31673 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31677 Searching for mathematics
31680 \begin_layout Standard
31681 Mathematical formulas, such as
31682 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31685 or something more complex like
31686 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31689 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31694 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31695 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31696 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31697 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31703 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31708 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31709 This is done by switching to the
31713 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31718 This way, entering in the
31725 \begin_layout Itemize
31726 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31727 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31730 \begin_layout Itemize
31731 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31732 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31735 \begin_layout Itemize
31736 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31737 of it only within section headings.
31738 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31739 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31743 \begin_layout Itemize
31744 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31745 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31752 \begin_layout Standard
31753 The entries made in the
31757 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31760 \begin_inset space ~
31766 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31770 button or alternatively press
31773 arg "break-paragraph"
31780 while the cursor is in the
31783 \begin_inset space ~
31791 \begin_layout Standard
31792 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
31793 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31797 \begin_layout Itemize
31798 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31799 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31807 with its typewriter version
31808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31822 \begin_layout Itemize
31823 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31829 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31841 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31848 (you may want to enable the
31851 \begin_inset space ~
31859 \begin_inset space ~
31864 options and disable the
31872 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31880 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31881 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31885 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31888 , or occurrences of
31889 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31893 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31899 \begin_layout Subsection
31903 \begin_layout Standard
31904 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31909 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31911 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31913 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31922 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31928 This is done with the context menu
31930 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31931 Insert Regular Expression
31933 while the cursor is in the
31938 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31939 expression matching rules
31943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31950 \begin_inset space ~
31953 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31954 to match expressions.
31959 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31960 same text in the document.
31961 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
31962 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31965 \begin_layout Enumerate
31966 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31971 editor the fraction
31972 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31976 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31979 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31980 fractions with the given denominator.
31983 \begin_layout Enumerate
31984 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31996 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32001 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32002 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32003 Also, by inserting a
32004 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32007 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32008 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32011 \begin_layout Standard
32012 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32013 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32014 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32017 , and referring back to them through
32018 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32022 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32026 For example, try searching with the regexp
32027 \begin_inset Newline newline
32030 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32033 \begin_inset Newline newline
32036 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32039 \begin_layout Standard
32040 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32043 \begin_layout Standard
32044 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32052 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32053 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32054 sub-expressions is absolute.
32056 \begin_inset space ~
32060 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32063 always refers to the first occurrence of
32064 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32067 in all entered regexps.
32075 \begin_layout Section
32077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32079 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32084 \begin_inset Index idx
32087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32096 \begin_layout Standard
32097 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32100 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32107 key or the toolbar button
32110 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32113 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32114 beginning of the currently selected text.
32115 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32116 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32117 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32118 scrolled so that it is visible.
32119 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32120 n, if any could be found.
32121 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32125 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32126 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32129 \begin_layout Standard
32130 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32133 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32137 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32138 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32139 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32140 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32143 \begin_inset space ~
32151 arg "dialog-show character"
32154 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32155 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32158 \begin_layout Standard
32159 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32160 \begin_inset Newline newline
32164 \begin_inset Flex URL
32167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32169 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32175 \begin_inset Newline newline
32179 \begin_inset space ~
32182 files for each language.
32183 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32184 \begin_inset space ~
32187 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32196 \begin_inset Newline newline
32199 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32200 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32201 but in most cases these are
32217 is the language code.
32220 \begin_layout Subsection
32224 \begin_layout Standard
32227 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32228 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32230 \begin_inset space ~
32233 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32236 you can set the following things:
32239 \begin_layout Description
32241 \begin_inset space ~
32244 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32245 Depending on your platform,
32259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32260 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32261 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32276 \begin_layout Description
32278 \begin_inset space ~
32281 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32282 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32285 \begin_layout Description
32287 \begin_inset space ~
32290 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32296 \begin_inset space \space{}
32300 This should normally not be needed.
32303 \begin_layout Description
32305 \begin_inset space ~
32309 \begin_inset space ~
32312 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32324 \begin_layout Description
32326 \begin_inset space ~
32329 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32330 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32331 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32332 appear in a context menu.
32333 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32337 \begin_layout Description
32339 \begin_inset space ~
32343 \begin_inset space ~
32347 \begin_inset space ~
32350 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32354 \begin_layout Section
32356 \begin_inset Index idx
32359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32368 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32375 \begin_layout Standard
32376 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32377 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32389 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32398 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32399 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32400 which are available for many languages.
32403 \begin_layout Standard
32404 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32408 \begin_layout Subsection
32409 Setting up the thesaurus
32412 \begin_layout Standard
32421 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32425 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32430 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32436 \begin_inset space ~
32444 For instance, the US English files are named:
32447 \begin_layout Itemize
32451 \begin_layout Itemize
32455 \begin_layout Standard
32464 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32465 and you just need to point LyX (in
32467 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32468 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32469 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32471 \begin_inset space ~
32476 ) to the path where they are installed.
32480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32481 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32482 ies, typical locations are
32488 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32492 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32496 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32499 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32505 LibreOffice-<Version>
32512 On the Mac, the default location is
32514 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32515 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32516 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32517 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32518 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32519 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32527 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32528 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32529 correct place right away.
32532 \begin_layout Standard
32533 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32534 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32538 \begin_layout Itemize
32539 \begin_inset Flex URL
32542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32544 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32552 \begin_layout Standard
32553 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32554 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32556 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32557 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32558 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32566 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32567 and point LyX there.
32570 \begin_layout Standard
32571 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32573 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32576 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32582 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32585 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32593 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32594 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32595 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32597 \begin_inset space ~
32602 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32605 \begin_layout Subsection
32606 Using the thesaurus
32609 \begin_layout Standard
32610 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32612 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32615 or the toolbar button
32618 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32621 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32623 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32625 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32626 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32627 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32636 ), related terms (such as
32639 \begin_inset space ~
32648 ), compounds (such as
32651 \begin_inset space ~
32660 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32669 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32672 \begin_layout Standard
32673 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32674 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32678 \begin_layout Standard
32679 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32680 the dictionary, such as the above
32684 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32689 \begin_inset space \space{}
32692 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32693 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32694 For example, looking up the word form
32698 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32703 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32708 \begin_inset space \space{}
32719 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32720 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32721 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32724 \begin_layout Section
32726 \begin_inset Index idx
32729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32736 \begin_inset Index idx
32739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32740 Document ! Change Tracking
32746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32748 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32755 \begin_layout Standard
32756 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32757 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32758 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32759 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32761 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32763 \begin_inset space ~
32766 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32768 \begin_inset space ~
32776 \begin_layout Standard
32777 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32791 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32792 You can change the color in
32794 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32795 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32797 \begin_inset space ~
32801 \begin_inset space ~
32806 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
32812 \begin_inset Index idx
32815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32816 Color ! Change tracking
32821 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32822 the cursor is in changed text.
32823 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32826 arg "changes-merge"
32832 \begin_layout Standard
32833 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32834 \begin_inset Index idx
32837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32846 \begin_layout Standard
32847 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32853 \begin_layout Standard
32854 \begin_inset Graphics
32855 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32863 \begin_layout Standard
32864 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32870 \begin_layout Standard
32871 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32875 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32882 \begin_inset Tabular
32883 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32884 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32885 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32886 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32896 arg "changes-track"
32904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32910 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32915 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32917 \begin_inset space ~
32926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32935 arg "changes-output"
32943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32949 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32951 \begin_inset space ~
32954 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32956 \begin_inset space ~
32960 \begin_inset space ~
32964 \begin_inset space ~
32973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32994 Jumps to the next change
33000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 arg "change-accept"
33017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33023 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33025 \begin_inset space ~
33028 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33030 \begin_inset space ~
33039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33048 arg "change-reject"
33056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33062 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33064 \begin_inset space ~
33067 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33069 \begin_inset space ~
33078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33087 arg "changes-merge"
33095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33101 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33103 \begin_inset space ~
33106 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33108 \begin_inset space ~
33117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33126 arg "all-changes-accept"
33134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33140 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33142 \begin_inset space ~
33145 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33147 \begin_inset space ~
33151 \begin_inset space ~
33160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33169 arg "all-changes-reject"
33177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33183 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33185 \begin_inset space ~
33188 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33190 \begin_inset space ~
33194 \begin_inset space ~
33203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33226 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33227 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33240 \begin_inset space ~
33249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33272 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33274 \begin_inset space ~
33290 \begin_layout Standard
33291 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33297 \begin_layout Standard
33298 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33318 \begin_layout Standard
33319 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33320 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33321 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33322 the next change after the current cursor position.
33323 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33324 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33325 step to the next change.
33326 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33329 \begin_layout Standard
33330 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33331 to describe a change.
33334 \begin_layout Standard
33335 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33340 \begin_inset Index idx
33343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33344 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33350 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33351 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33357 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33360 \begin_layout Section
33361 Comparison of Documents
33362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33364 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33369 \begin_inset Index idx
33372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33373 Comparison of documents
33381 \begin_layout Standard
33382 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33384 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33388 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33390 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33391 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33395 \begin_inset space ~
33399 \begin_inset space ~
33403 \begin_inset space ~
33412 \begin_inset space ~
33416 \begin_inset space ~
33420 \begin_inset space ~
33424 \begin_inset space ~
33428 \begin_inset space ~
33432 \begin_inset space ~
33437 enables the change tracking option
33440 \begin_inset space ~
33444 \begin_inset space ~
33448 \begin_inset space ~
33453 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33456 \begin_layout Section
33457 International Support
33458 \begin_inset Index idx
33461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33462 International support
33470 \begin_layout Standard
33471 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33472 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33473 up LyX to use them:
33474 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33476 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33483 \begin_layout Standard
33484 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33485 \begin_inset space ~
33489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33491 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33498 \begin_layout Subsection
33500 \begin_inset Index idx
33503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33510 \begin_inset Index idx
33513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33514 Document ! Settings
33520 \begin_inset Index idx
33523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33524 Document ! Language
33532 \begin_layout Standard
33535 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33536 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33539 dialog lets you set
33541 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33546 \begin_layout Standard
33551 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33555 \begin_inset space ~
33560 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33561 For details about the different encoding options see section
33562 \begin_inset space ~
33566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33568 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33575 \begin_layout Subsection
33576 Keyboard mapping configuration
33577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33579 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33586 \begin_layout Standard
33587 If you have for example a U.
33588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33591 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33592 can use an alternate keymap.
33593 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33594 use an Italian keymap.
33597 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33598 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33599 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33602 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33603 \begin_inset space ~
33607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33609 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33614 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33615 which one you want to use.
33618 \begin_layout Standard
33619 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33620 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33621 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33625 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33626 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33627 one to support the characters you want.
33628 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33635 \begin_layout Chapter
33638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33640 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33647 \begin_layout Standard
33648 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33649 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33650 topic inside the user's guide.
33653 \begin_layout Section
33655 \begin_inset Index idx
33658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33667 \begin_layout Standard
33672 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33675 \begin_layout Subsection
33679 \begin_layout Standard
33680 Creates a new document.
33683 \begin_layout Subsection
33687 \begin_layout Standard
33688 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33689 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33690 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33693 \begin_layout Subsection
33697 \begin_layout Standard
33701 \begin_layout Subsection
33705 \begin_layout Standard
33706 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33707 Click there on a file to open it.
33710 \begin_layout Subsection
33714 \begin_layout Standard
33715 Closes the current document.
33718 \begin_layout Subsection
33722 \begin_layout Standard
33723 Closes all opened documents.
33726 \begin_layout Subsection
33730 \begin_layout Standard
33731 Saves the actual document.
33734 \begin_layout Subsection
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33739 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33742 \begin_layout Subsection
33746 \begin_layout Standard
33747 Saves all opened documents.
33750 \begin_layout Subsection
33754 \begin_layout Standard
33755 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33758 \begin_layout Subsection
33762 \begin_layout Standard
33763 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33764 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33765 It is described in the section
33767 Version Control in LyX
33771 Additional Features
33776 \begin_layout Subsection
33780 \begin_layout Standard
33781 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33782 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33784 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33787 \begin_layout Standard
33788 When using the menu entry
33791 \begin_inset space ~
33796 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33800 \begin_inset space ~
33804 \begin_inset space ~
33808 \begin_inset space ~
33813 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33814 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33817 \begin_layout Subsection
33819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33828 \begin_layout Standard
33829 You can export your document to various file formats.
33830 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33831 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33832 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33835 \begin_layout Standard
33836 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33844 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
33851 \begin_layout Description
33857 \begin_inset space ~
33864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33871 yX format of the special LyX
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33875 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33876 \begin_inset Newline newline
33879 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
33882 \begin_layout Description
33883 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33889 \begin_layout Description
33891 \begin_inset space ~
33894 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33900 \begin_layout Description
33901 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
33902 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33903 files paths or file names in your document.
33904 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33911 \begin_layout Description
33912 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33913 in files paths or file names
33916 \begin_layout Description
33918 \begin_inset space ~
33925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33932 eX) DVI-format using the program
33936 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
33939 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33947 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33955 \begin_layout Description
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33960 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33964 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33969 \begin_layout Description
33970 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
33974 \begin_layout Description
33976 \begin_inset space ~
33980 \begin_inset space ~
33983 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33987 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33995 \begin_layout Description
34002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34010 \begin_inset space ~
34021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34034 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34039 \begin_layout Description
34046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34054 \begin_inset space ~
34059 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34060 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34064 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34067 \begin_layout Description
34074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34082 \begin_inset space ~
34087 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34088 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34096 \begin_layout Description
34103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34111 \begin_inset space ~
34122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34135 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34140 \begin_layout Description
34142 \begin_inset space ~
34146 \begin_inset space ~
34155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34164 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34165 music notation software
34170 \begin_layout Description
34177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34187 \begin_inset space ~
34191 \begin_inset space ~
34194 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34195 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34196 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34199 \begin_layout Description
34206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34219 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34235 represent the version number)
34238 \begin_layout Description
34245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34254 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34257 \begin_layout Description
34258 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34263 \begin_layout Description
34264 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34266 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34269 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34273 \begin_layout Description
34277 \begin_inset space ~
34282 PDF-format using the program
34286 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34289 \begin_layout Description
34293 \begin_inset space ~
34300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34309 PDF-format using the program
34313 , produces PDF-files directly
34316 \begin_layout Description
34320 \begin_inset space ~
34325 PDF-format using the program
34329 , produces PDF-files directly
34332 \begin_layout Description
34336 \begin_inset space ~
34341 PDF-format using the program
34345 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34348 \begin_layout Description
34352 \begin_inset space ~
34359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34368 PDF-format using the program
34372 , produces PDF-files directly
34375 \begin_layout Description
34379 \begin_inset space ~
34387 \begin_layout Description
34391 \begin_inset space ~
34395 \begin_inset space ~
34400 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34401 and then exported as text using the program
34406 \begin_layout Description
34411 PostScript format using the program
34416 \begin_layout Description
34417 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34418 programming language
34431 it is possible to use
34438 \begin_layout Standard
34439 If one of the menu entries
34446 \begin_inset space ~
34455 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34456 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34457 \begin_inset space ~
34461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34463 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34468 \begin_inset Index idx
34471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34472 Reconfiguration of LyX
34480 \begin_layout Subsection
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34485 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34486 format or send it to a printer.
34487 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34488 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34494 For more information have a look at section
34495 \begin_inset space ~
34499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34501 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34508 \begin_layout Subsection
34512 \begin_layout Standard
34513 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34514 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34515 prefix, see section
34516 \begin_inset space ~
34520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34522 reference "sec:Paths"
34527 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34536 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34537 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34538 \begin_inset space ~
34542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34544 reference "sub:Converters"
34551 \begin_layout Subsection
34552 New and Close Window
34555 \begin_layout Standard
34556 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34559 \begin_layout Subsection
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34567 \begin_layout Section
34569 \begin_inset Index idx
34572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34581 \begin_layout Subsection
34585 \begin_layout Standard
34586 Described in section
34587 \begin_inset space ~
34591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34593 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34600 \begin_layout Subsection
34601 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34604 \begin_layout Standard
34605 Described in section
34606 \begin_inset space ~
34610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34612 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34619 \begin_layout Subsection
34623 \begin_layout Standard
34624 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34625 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34628 \begin_layout Subsection
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 Selects the whole document.
34636 \begin_layout Subsection
34637 Find & Replace (Quick)
34640 \begin_layout Standard
34641 Described in section
34642 \begin_inset space ~
34646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34648 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34655 \begin_layout Subsection
34656 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 Described in section
34661 \begin_inset space ~
34665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34667 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34674 \begin_layout Subsection
34675 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34678 \begin_layout Standard
34679 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34683 \begin_layout Subsection
34687 \begin_layout Standard
34688 Described in section
34689 \begin_inset space ~
34693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34695 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34702 \begin_layout Subsection
34704 \begin_inset Index idx
34707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34708 Paragraph ! Settings
34716 \begin_layout Standard
34717 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34718 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34722 \begin_layout Standard
34723 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34724 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34730 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34731 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34733 \begin_inset space ~
34741 \begin_layout Subsection
34745 \begin_layout Standard
34746 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34747 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34748 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34752 \begin_layout Standard
34753 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34755 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34756 The properties of tables are described in section
34757 \begin_inset space ~
34761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34763 reference "sec:Tables"
34767 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34768 \begin_inset space ~
34772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34774 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34781 \begin_layout Subsection
34782 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34786 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34788 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34789 \begin_inset space ~
34793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34795 reference "sec:Nesting"
34800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34802 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34809 \begin_layout Section
34811 \begin_inset Index idx
34814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34823 \begin_layout Standard
34824 At the bottom of the
34828 menu the opened documents are listed.
34831 \begin_layout Subsection
34832 Open/Close all Insets
34835 \begin_layout Standard
34836 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34839 \begin_layout Subsection
34840 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34843 \begin_layout Standard
34844 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34847 \begin_layout Standard
34848 Math macros are described in the
34855 \begin_layout Subsection
34859 \begin_layout Standard
34860 Shows the outline window as described in sections
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34867 reference "sec:Navigating"
34872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34874 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
34881 \begin_layout Subsection
34885 \begin_layout Standard
34886 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34888 \begin_inset space ~
34892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34894 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34901 \begin_layout Subsection
34905 \begin_layout Standard
34906 Opens a window showing console messages.
34907 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
34908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34911 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34912 while LaTeX is processing the document.
34915 \begin_layout Subsection
34917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34919 name "sub:Toolbars"
34924 \begin_inset Index idx
34927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34936 \begin_layout Standard
34937 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34938 All toolbars and the
34941 \begin_inset space ~
34946 can be turned on and off.
34951 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34975 \begin_inset space ~
34980 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
34984 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
34991 \begin_layout Standard
34996 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35000 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35001 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35002 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35003 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35004 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35007 \begin_layout Standard
35008 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35009 \begin_inset space ~
35013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35015 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35022 \begin_layout Subsection
35026 \begin_layout Standard
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35038 \begin_inset space ~
35042 \begin_inset space ~
35046 \begin_inset space ~
35050 \begin_inset space ~
35055 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35058 \begin_inset space ~
35062 \begin_inset space ~
35066 \begin_inset space ~
35070 \begin_inset space ~
35074 \begin_inset space ~
35078 \begin_inset space ~
35083 will split it horizontally.
35084 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35085 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35086 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35087 three or more documents at the same time.
35088 To close a split view, use the menu
35091 \begin_inset space ~
35095 \begin_inset space ~
35103 \begin_layout Subsection
35107 \begin_layout Standard
35108 Closes a split view.
35111 \begin_layout Subsection
35115 \begin_layout Standard
35116 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35117 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35118 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35119 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35120 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35123 \begin_layout Section
35125 \begin_inset Index idx
35128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35137 \begin_layout Subsection
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35143 \begin_inset space ~
35147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35149 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35160 \begin_layout Subsection
35162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35164 name "sub:Special-Character"
35171 \begin_layout Standard
35172 Here you can insert the following characters:
35175 \begin_layout Description
35180 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35182 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35183 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35184 You can get a complete display by checking
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35193 \begin_inset Newline newline
35197 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35205 Not all characters will be visible in the
35209 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35217 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35221 ) can display every character.
35229 \begin_layout Description
35230 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35234 \begin_layout Description
35236 \begin_inset space ~
35240 \begin_inset space ~
35243 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35244 \begin_inset space ~
35248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35250 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35257 \begin_layout Description
35259 \begin_inset space ~
35262 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35265 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35266 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35272 \begin_layout Description
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35277 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35280 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35281 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35287 \begin_layout Description
35289 \begin_inset space ~
35292 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35296 \begin_layout Description
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35301 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35305 \begin_layout Description
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35310 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35316 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35322 \begin_layout Description
35324 \begin_inset space ~
35327 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35331 \begin_layout Description
35333 \begin_inset space ~
35337 \begin_inset Index idx
35340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35347 \begin_inset Index idx
35350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35351 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35356 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35357 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35359 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35364 \begin_inset Index idx
35367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35368 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35374 \begin_inset Newline newline
35377 More information about this feature can be found in the
35383 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35389 \begin_layout Subsection
35393 \begin_layout Standard
35394 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35397 \begin_layout Description
35398 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35399 \begin_inset script superscript
35401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35410 \begin_layout Description
35411 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35412 \begin_inset script subscript
35414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35423 \begin_layout Description
35425 \begin_inset space ~
35428 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35429 \begin_inset space ~
35433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35435 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35442 \begin_layout Description
35444 \begin_inset space ~
35447 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35448 \begin_inset space ~
35452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35454 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35461 \begin_layout Description
35463 \begin_inset space ~
35466 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35473 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35480 \begin_layout Description
35482 \begin_inset space ~
35485 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35491 \begin_inset space \space{}
35494 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35495 An example from the LyX
35500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35503 To insert a fraction use the command
35508 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35512 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35521 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35528 \begin_layout Description
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35533 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35534 \begin_inset space ~
35538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35540 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35547 \begin_layout Description
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35552 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35553 \begin_inset space ~
35557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35559 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35566 \begin_layout Description
35568 \begin_inset space ~
35571 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35572 \begin_inset space ~
35576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35578 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35585 \begin_layout Description
35586 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35587 \begin_inset space ~
35591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35593 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35600 \begin_layout Description
35602 \begin_inset space ~
35605 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35606 \begin_inset space ~
35610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35612 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35619 \begin_layout Description
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35624 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35631 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35638 \begin_layout Description
35640 \begin_inset space ~
35644 \begin_inset space ~
35647 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35648 \begin_inset space ~
35652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35654 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35661 \begin_layout Description
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35666 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35667 as described in section
35668 \begin_inset space ~
35672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35674 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35681 \begin_layout Description
35683 \begin_inset space ~
35686 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35687 \begin_inset space ~
35691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35693 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35700 \begin_layout Description
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35705 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35706 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35714 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35721 \begin_layout Description
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35726 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35727 \begin_inset space ~
35731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35733 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35740 \begin_layout Description
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35746 \begin_inset space ~
35749 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35750 \begin_inset space ~
35754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35756 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35763 \begin_layout Subsection
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35768 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35772 \begin_inset space ~
35789 are described in section
35790 \begin_inset space ~
35794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35796 reference "sec:toc"
35805 is described in section
35806 \begin_inset space ~
35810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35812 reference "sec:Index"
35820 is described in section
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35827 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35833 BibTeX Bibliography
35835 is described in section
35836 \begin_inset space ~
35840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35842 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
35849 \begin_layout Subsection
35853 \begin_layout Standard
35854 To insert floats, as described in section
35855 \begin_inset space ~
35859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35861 reference "sec:Floats"
35865 and in detail the chapter
35872 \begin_inset space ~
35880 \begin_layout Subsection
35884 \begin_layout Standard
35885 To insert notes, described in section
35886 \begin_inset space ~
35890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35892 reference "sec:Notes"
35899 \begin_layout Subsection
35903 \begin_layout Standard
35904 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
35906 Branches are described in section
35907 \begin_inset space ~
35911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35913 reference "sec:Branches"
35920 \begin_layout Subsection
35924 \begin_layout Standard
35925 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35926 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35928 An example is the document class
35929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35936 with three custom insets.
35939 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35943 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
35949 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35952 \begin_layout Subsection
35954 \begin_inset Index idx
35957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35966 \begin_layout Standard
35967 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35969 For more information see chapter
35971 External Document Parts
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35980 \begin_layout Subsection
35982 \begin_inset Index idx
35985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35994 \begin_layout Standard
35995 Inserts a box in a certain style.
35996 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36003 \begin_inset space ~
36011 \begin_layout Subsection
36015 \begin_layout Standard
36020 dialog as described in section
36021 \begin_inset space ~
36025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36027 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36034 \begin_layout Subsection
36038 \begin_layout Standard
36043 as described in section
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36050 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36057 \begin_layout Subsection
36061 \begin_layout Standard
36066 as described in section
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36073 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36080 \begin_layout Subsection
36082 \begin_inset Index idx
36085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36092 \begin_inset Index idx
36095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36096 Longtables ! Caption
36104 \begin_layout Standard
36105 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36106 Floats are described in section
36107 \begin_inset space ~
36111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36113 reference "sec:Floats"
36117 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36124 \begin_inset space ~
36132 \begin_layout Subsection
36136 \begin_layout Standard
36137 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36138 \begin_inset space ~
36142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36144 reference "sec:Index"
36151 \begin_layout Subsection
36155 \begin_layout Standard
36156 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36163 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36170 \begin_layout Subsection
36174 \begin_layout Standard
36175 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36176 Tables are described in section
36177 \begin_inset space ~
36181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36183 reference "sec:Tables"
36187 and in detail in the chapter
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36202 \begin_layout Subsection
36206 \begin_layout Standard
36212 Graphics are described in section
36213 \begin_inset space ~
36217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36219 reference "sec:Graphics"
36226 \begin_layout Subsection
36230 \begin_layout Standard
36231 Inserts a URL as described in section
36232 \begin_inset space ~
36236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36238 reference "sub:URLs"
36245 \begin_layout Subsection
36249 \begin_layout Standard
36250 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36251 \begin_inset space ~
36255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36257 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36264 \begin_layout Subsection
36268 \begin_layout Standard
36269 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36276 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36283 \begin_layout Subsection
36287 \begin_layout Standard
36288 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36289 \begin_inset space ~
36293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36295 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36302 \begin_layout Subsection
36306 \begin_layout Standard
36307 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36308 title or caption of a float.
36309 Inserts a short title as described in section
36310 \begin_inset space ~
36314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36316 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36323 \begin_layout Subsection
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36329 \begin_inset space ~
36333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36335 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36342 \begin_layout Subsection
36344 \begin_inset Index idx
36347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36356 \begin_layout Standard
36357 Inserts a program listings box.
36358 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36360 Program Code Listings
36365 \begin_inset space ~
36373 \begin_layout Subsection
36377 \begin_layout Standard
36378 Inserts the actual date.
36379 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36381 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36389 \begin_inset space ~
36397 \begin_layout Subsection
36401 \begin_layout Standard
36402 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36409 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36416 \begin_layout Section
36418 \begin_inset Index idx
36421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36430 \begin_layout Standard
36431 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36432 \begin_inset space ~
36435 of the current document.
36436 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36439 \begin_layout Subsection
36443 \begin_layout Standard
36444 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36445 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36446 to jump, for example, between section
36447 \begin_inset space ~
36451 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36452 \begin_inset space ~
36455 2.5 and use the submenu
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36462 \begin_inset space ~
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset space ~
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36485 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36489 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36495 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36498 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36501 \begin_layout Standard
36502 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36511 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36519 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36522 \begin_layout Subsection
36523 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36526 \begin_layout Standard
36527 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36531 \begin_layout Subsection
36535 \begin_layout Standard
36536 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36537 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36538 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36542 \begin_inset space ~
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36554 \begin_layout Subsection
36558 \begin_layout Standard
36559 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36562 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36572 \begin_inset space ~
36577 manual for a detailed description.
36580 \begin_layout Section
36582 \begin_inset Index idx
36585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36594 \begin_layout Subsection
36598 \begin_layout Standard
36599 Change Tracking is described in section
36600 \begin_inset space ~
36604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36606 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36613 \begin_layout Subsection
36618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36628 \begin_layout Standard
36629 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36631 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36632 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36633 to the clipboard or update the view.
36634 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36637 \begin_layout Subsection
36638 Start Appendix Here
36641 \begin_layout Standard
36642 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36643 as described in section
36644 \begin_inset space ~
36648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36650 reference "sec:Appendices"
36657 \begin_layout Subsection
36659 \begin_inset space ~
36665 \begin_layout Standard
36666 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36667 default output format for the document (menu
36669 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36670 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36671 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36673 \begin_inset space ~
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36689 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36693 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36695 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36696 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36698 \begin_inset space ~
36701 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36703 \begin_inset space ~
36706 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36712 \begin_inset space ~
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36724 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36728 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36729 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36731 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36732 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36737 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36742 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36752 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36757 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36758 The default output format is
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36769 \begin_layout Subsection
36770 View (Other Formats)
36773 \begin_layout Standard
36774 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36775 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36776 actual document with an external program.
36777 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36778 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
36779 All possible formats are listed in section
36780 \begin_inset space ~
36784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36786 reference "sub:Export"
36791 You should at least see the menu entry
36796 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
36797 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
36798 \begin_inset space ~
36802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36804 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36809 \begin_inset Index idx
36812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36813 Reconfiguration of LyX
36821 \begin_layout Standard
36822 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36823 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36825 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36826 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36831 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36833 \begin_inset space ~
36836 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36846 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36851 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36854 \begin_layout Subsection
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36862 \begin_layout Standard
36863 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
36864 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
36867 \begin_layout Subsection
36868 Update (Other Formats)
36871 \begin_layout Standard
36872 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
36873 your document without opening a new viewer window.
36876 \begin_layout Subsection
36877 View Master Document
36880 \begin_layout Standard
36881 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36897 \begin_inset space ~
36902 manual for more information on this topic).
36903 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
36904 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
36908 \begin_inset space ~
36912 \begin_inset space ~
36917 generates the output of the whole book, while
36921 will just output the chapter alone.
36924 \begin_layout Standard
36925 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36926 in the document settings (menu
36928 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36929 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36930 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36932 \begin_inset space ~
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36942 \begin_inset space ~
36946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36948 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36952 ) or in the preferences (menu
36954 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36955 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36957 \begin_inset space ~
36960 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36962 \begin_inset space ~
36965 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36967 \begin_inset space ~
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36983 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36990 \begin_layout Subsection
36991 Update Master Document
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36995 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37011 \begin_inset space ~
37016 manual for more information on this topic).
37017 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37018 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37021 \begin_layout Standard
37022 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37023 in the document settings (menu
37025 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37026 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37027 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37039 \begin_inset space ~
37043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37045 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37049 ) or in the preferences (menu
37051 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37052 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37054 \begin_inset space ~
37057 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37062 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37068 \begin_inset space ~
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37080 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37087 \begin_layout Subsection
37091 \begin_layout Standard
37092 Un/compresses the current document.
37095 \begin_layout Subsection
37099 \begin_layout Standard
37100 The document settings are described in appendix
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37107 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37114 \begin_layout Section
37116 \begin_inset Index idx
37119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37128 \begin_layout Subsection
37132 \begin_layout Standard
37133 Spell checking is explained in section
37134 \begin_inset space ~
37138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37140 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37147 \begin_layout Subsection
37151 \begin_layout Standard
37152 The thesaurus is described in section
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37159 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37166 \begin_layout Subsection
37168 \begin_inset Index idx
37171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37178 \begin_inset Index idx
37181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37190 \begin_layout Standard
37191 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37192 the highlighted document part.
37195 \begin_layout Subsection
37200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37208 \begin_inset Index idx
37211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37220 \begin_layout Standard
37221 Generates with the help of the program
37225 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37226 This feature is not available on Windows.
37229 \begin_layout Subsection
37234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37242 \begin_inset Index idx
37245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37265 to see the full filename paths.
37268 \begin_layout Subsection
37270 \begin_inset Index idx
37273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37282 \begin_layout Standard
37283 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37284 \begin_inset space ~
37288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37290 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37297 \begin_layout Subsection
37299 \begin_inset Index idx
37302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37303 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37314 Reconfiguration of LyX
37318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37331 \begin_inset Index idx
37334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37335 Reconfiguration of LyX
37343 \begin_layout Standard
37344 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37345 needs; see also section
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37352 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37359 \begin_layout Subsection
37363 \begin_layout Standard
37368 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37369 \begin_inset space ~
37373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37375 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37382 \begin_layout Section
37384 \begin_inset Index idx
37387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37396 \begin_layout Standard
37397 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37399 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37403 \begin_layout Standard
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37412 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37413 found by LyX (see also section
37414 \begin_inset space ~
37418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37420 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37427 \begin_layout Standard
37431 \begin_inset space ~
37438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37447 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37451 \begin_layout Section
37453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37455 name "sec:Toolbars"
37462 \begin_layout Standard
37463 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37470 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37479 This is described in the
37481 Additional Features
37486 \begin_layout Subsection
37488 \begin_inset Index idx
37491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37500 \begin_layout Standard
37501 \begin_inset Graphics
37502 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37510 \begin_layout Standard
37511 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37517 \begin_layout Standard
37518 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37535 \begin_inset Note Note
37538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37539 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37544 manual for more information.
37552 \begin_layout Standard
37553 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 \begin_inset Tabular
37561 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37562 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37564 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37570 \begin_inset Graphics
37571 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37585 pull-down box for the environments
37598 \begin_layout Standard
37599 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37605 \begin_layout Standard
37607 \begin_inset Tabular
37608 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37609 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37610 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37611 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37635 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37642 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37665 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37672 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37695 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37711 arg "dialog-show print"
37719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37725 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37732 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37741 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37755 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37785 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37815 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37845 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37875 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37905 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37921 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37935 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37961 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37975 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38003 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38017 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38018 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38046 Emphasize text, function of the
38048 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38050 \begin_inset space ~
38053 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38083 Set text to noun style, function of the
38085 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38090 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38108 arg "textstyle-apply"
38116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38120 Format text using the current settings in the
38122 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38127 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38159 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38160 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38162 \begin_inset space ~
38171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38180 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38194 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38208 arg "tabular-insert"
38216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38222 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38238 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38250 Toggle outline window on/off,
38252 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38268 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38280 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38295 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38307 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38320 \begin_layout Subsection
38322 \begin_inset Index idx
38325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38334 \begin_layout Standard
38335 \begin_inset Graphics
38336 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38344 \begin_layout Standard
38345 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38351 \begin_layout Standard
38352 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38356 \begin_layout Standard
38357 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38363 \begin_layout Standard
38364 \begin_inset Tabular
38365 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38366 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38367 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38368 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38396 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38405 arg "layout Enumerate"
38413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38432 arg "layout Itemize"
38440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38486 arg "layout Description"
38494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38513 arg "depth-increment"
38521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38527 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38533 \begin_inset space ~
38542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38551 arg "depth-decrement"
38559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38567 \begin_inset space ~
38571 \begin_inset space ~
38580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38589 arg "float-insert figure"
38597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38603 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38604 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38620 arg "float-insert table"
38628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38634 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38635 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38642 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38672 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38681 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38711 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38732 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38755 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38775 arg "nomencl-insert"
38783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38789 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38791 \begin_inset space ~
38800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38809 arg "footnote-insert"
38817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38823 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38855 \begin_inset space ~
38864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38887 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38888 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38901 \begin_inset space ~
38910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38919 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38933 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38963 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38993 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39010 \begin_inset space ~
39019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39028 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39042 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39043 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39073 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39074 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 arg "dialog-show character"
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39108 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39113 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39129 arg "layout-paragraph"
39137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39143 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39177 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39191 \begin_layout Subsection
39192 View/Update Toolbar
39193 \begin_inset Index idx
39196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 Toolbar ! View / Update
39205 \begin_layout Standard
39206 \begin_inset Graphics
39207 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39214 \begin_layout Standard
39215 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39221 \begin_layout Standard
39222 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39226 \begin_layout Standard
39227 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39233 \begin_layout Standard
39234 \begin_inset Tabular
39235 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39236 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39238 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39262 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39278 arg "buffer-update"
39286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39292 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39308 arg "master-buffer-view"
39316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39322 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39342 arg "master-buffer-update"
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39358 \begin_inset space ~
39362 \begin_inset space ~
39371 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39380 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39394 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39395 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39396 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39397 Synchronize with Output
39403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39408 \begin_inset Graphics
39409 filename ../images/view-others.png
39411 groupId toolbarbuttons
39422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39428 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39429 View (Other Formats)
39435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39440 \begin_inset Graphics
39441 filename ../images/update-others.png
39443 groupId toolbarbuttons
39452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39458 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39459 Update (Other Formats)
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39473 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39477 \begin_layout Subsection
39481 \begin_layout Standard
39482 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39483 \begin_inset space ~
39487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39489 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39493 , the table toolbar
39494 \begin_inset Index idx
39497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39506 \begin_inset space ~
39511 manual and the math macro toolbar
39512 \begin_inset Index idx
39515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39528 \begin_layout Chapter
39529 The Document Settings
39530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39532 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39537 \begin_inset Index idx
39540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39541 Document ! Settings
39549 \begin_layout Standard
39553 \begin_inset space ~
39558 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39559 is called with the menu
39561 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39565 You can save your document settings as default with the
39567 Save as Document Defaults
39569 button in any dialog.
39570 This will create a template named
39574 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39578 \begin_layout Standard
39583 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39584 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39587 \begin_layout Standard
39588 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39589 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39590 to find the one you are looking for.
39591 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39592 the submenus of the dialog.
39594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39598 \begin_inset space \space{}
39602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39609 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39610 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39611 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39614 \begin_layout Section
39618 \begin_layout Standard
39619 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39621 Document classes are described in section
39622 \begin_inset space ~
39626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39628 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39636 \begin_layout Standard
39640 \begin_inset space ~
39645 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39649 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39650 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39652 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39661 \begin_layout Standard
39662 Some classes use special class options by default.
39663 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39667 and you can decide to use them or not.
39668 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39669 recommended you leave them untouched.
39674 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39679 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39680 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39686 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39687 \begin_inset Newline newline
39692 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39695 \begin_inset Newline newline
39698 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39704 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39706 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39718 \begin_layout Standard
39723 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39724 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39725 document is opened without its master.
39726 This way child documents are always compilable.
39727 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39734 \begin_inset space ~
39742 \begin_layout Standard
39743 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39753 \begin_inset Index idx
39756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39757 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39763 \begin_inset Index idx
39766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39767 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39772 for cross-references, see section
39773 \begin_inset space ~
39777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39779 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39786 \begin_layout Section
39790 \begin_layout Standard
39791 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39792 Please refer to the section
39795 \begin_inset space ~
39803 \begin_inset space ~
39808 manual for details.
39811 \begin_layout Section
39815 \begin_layout Standard
39816 Modules are explained in section
39817 \begin_inset space ~
39821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39823 reference "sub:Modules"
39830 \begin_layout Section
39834 \begin_layout Standard
39836 \begin_inset space ~
39840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39842 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
39849 \begin_layout Section
39853 \begin_layout Standard
39854 The document font settings are described in section
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39861 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39868 \begin_layout Section
39872 \begin_layout Standard
39873 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
39885 \begin_inset space ~
39890 and whether it should be a
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39898 can also be specified here.
39901 \begin_layout Standard
39902 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
39904 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39906 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
39909 \begin_layout Section
39913 \begin_layout Standard
39914 This dialog is described in sections
39915 \begin_inset space ~
39919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39921 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39928 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
39935 \begin_layout Section
39939 \begin_layout Standard
39940 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
39941 \begin_inset space ~
39945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39947 reference "sub:Margins"
39954 \begin_layout Section
39956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39958 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39963 \begin_inset Index idx
39966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39967 Language ! Encoding
39975 \begin_layout Standard
39976 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39977 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
39978 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
39979 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39980 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
39981 known for a particular character).
39985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39986 The known commands are defined in a text file (
39991 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
39996 manual for details.
40004 \begin_layout Standard
40005 If you use the option
40009 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40010 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40011 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40012 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40013 exactly one encoding.
40014 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40017 \begin_layout Standard
40018 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40019 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40020 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40021 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40022 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40023 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40028 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40029 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40030 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40031 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40032 engines to standard LaTeX.
40033 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40034 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40075 \begin_inset space ~
40081 \begin_inset space ~
40085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40087 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40092 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40096 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40099 \begin_layout Standard
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40108 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40118 The possible settings are:
40121 \begin_layout Description
40122 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40124 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40125 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40135 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40142 \begin_layout Description
40143 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40144 format you will use.
40145 In many cases this will be
40150 \begin_inset Index idx
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40154 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40160 If the newer package
40165 \begin_inset Index idx
40168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40169 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40174 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40175 this package will be used instead of
40182 \begin_layout Description
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40195 would be more appropriate.
40198 \begin_layout Description
40199 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40200 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40204 (for German texts), type in
40207 \begin_inset Newline newline
40212 usepackage{ngerman}
40215 \begin_layout Description
40216 None will not use a language package.
40217 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40221 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40224 \begin_layout Description
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40241 , but the LaTeX-package
40246 \begin_inset Index idx
40249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40250 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40256 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40257 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40258 languages in TeX code.
40261 \begin_layout Description
40262 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40263 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40264 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40267 \begin_layout Description
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40276 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40279 \begin_layout Description
40281 \begin_inset space ~
40285 \begin_inset space ~
40288 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40291 \begin_layout Description
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40296 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40299 \begin_layout Description
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40308 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40309 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40312 \begin_layout Description
40314 \begin_inset space ~
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40321 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40325 \begin_layout Description
40327 \begin_inset space ~
40331 \begin_inset space ~
40334 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40335 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40338 \begin_layout Description
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40351 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40358 \begin_layout Description
40360 \begin_inset space ~
40364 \begin_inset space ~
40368 \begin_inset space ~
40371 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40372 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40375 \begin_layout Description
40377 \begin_inset space ~
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40384 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40385 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40386 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40387 \begin_inset space ~
40391 \begin_inset space ~
40397 \begin_layout Description
40399 \begin_inset space ~
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40406 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40407 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40408 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40409 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40410 \begin_inset space ~
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_layout Description
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40426 \begin_inset space ~
40429 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40432 \begin_layout Description
40434 \begin_inset space ~
40438 \begin_inset space ~
40441 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40444 \begin_layout Description
40446 \begin_inset space ~
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40453 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40456 \begin_layout Description
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40461 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40464 \begin_layout Description
40466 \begin_inset space ~
40469 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40472 \begin_layout Description
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40481 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40484 \begin_layout Description
40486 \begin_inset space ~
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_layout Description
40498 \begin_inset space ~
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40505 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40508 \begin_layout Description
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_layout Description
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40529 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40534 \begin_inset Index idx
40537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40538 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40543 , when using this, set the document language to
40548 \begin_layout Description
40550 \begin_inset space ~
40554 \begin_inset space ~
40557 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40561 , when using this, set the document language to
40564 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_layout Description
40572 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40579 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40584 \begin_inset Index idx
40587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40588 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40593 , when using this, set the document language to
40598 \begin_layout Description
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40607 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40611 , when using this, set the document language to
40616 \begin_layout Description
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40625 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40629 , when using this, set the document language to
40634 \begin_layout Description
40636 \begin_inset space ~
40639 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40642 \begin_layout Description
40644 \begin_inset space ~
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40655 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40658 \begin_layout Description
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40664 \begin_inset space ~
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40671 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40672 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40673 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40676 \begin_layout Description
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_inset space ~
40688 \begin_layout Description
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40697 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40698 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40701 \begin_layout Description
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40710 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40715 \begin_inset Index idx
40718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40719 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40724 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40727 \begin_layout Description
40729 \begin_inset space ~
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40736 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40744 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40749 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40751 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40754 \begin_layout Description
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40763 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40768 \begin_inset Index idx
40771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40772 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
40777 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40780 \begin_layout Description
40782 \begin_inset space ~
40785 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40790 \begin_inset Index idx
40793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40794 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40800 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40804 \begin_layout Description
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40814 \begin_inset space ~
40817 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40824 \begin_layout Description
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_inset space ~
40834 \begin_inset space ~
40837 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40838 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40839 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40843 \begin_layout Description
40845 \begin_inset space ~
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40853 \begin_inset space ~
40856 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40857 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40860 \begin_layout Section
40862 \begin_inset Index idx
40865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40872 \begin_inset Index idx
40875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40882 \begin_inset Index idx
40885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40886 Color ! Shaded boxes
40892 \begin_inset Index idx
40895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40896 Color ! Greyed-out notes
40904 \begin_layout Standard
40905 Here you can alter the font color for the
40909 (default: black), for
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40917 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
40921 (default: white) and for
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40934 sets the color back to the default.
40937 \begin_layout Standard
40938 Clicking any button showing
40946 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
40947 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
40948 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
40949 later more quickly.
40952 \begin_layout Standard
40953 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40957 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40962 out note appears blue in the output.)
40970 \begin_layout Standard
40971 Note, if you change the
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40979 font color and use the option
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40987 in the document settings under
40990 \begin_inset space ~
40995 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
40996 \begin_inset space ~
41000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41002 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41009 \begin_layout Standard
41010 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41016 \begin_layout Standard
41020 \begin_inset space ~
41029 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41034 Code after a forced page break:
41037 \begin_layout Itemize
41038 For the page color:
41039 \begin_inset Newline newline
41046 pagecolor{color name}
41049 \begin_layout Itemize
41050 For the text color:
41051 \begin_inset Newline newline
41061 \begin_layout Standard
41062 You are restricted to one of
41098 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41111 \begin_inset Newline newline
41114 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41115 names to refer to them:
41118 \begin_layout Itemize
41124 \begin_inset Newline newline
41129 page_backgroundcolor
41132 \begin_layout Itemize
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41142 \begin_inset Newline newline
41150 \begin_layout Itemize
41154 \begin_inset space ~
41160 \begin_inset Newline newline
41168 \begin_layout Itemize
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41178 \begin_inset Newline newline
41186 \begin_layout Standard
41187 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41188 \begin_inset space ~
41191 Cells of the Embedded
41192 \begin_inset space ~
41198 \begin_layout Section
41202 \begin_layout Standard
41203 Here you can adjust the
41207 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41211 as described in section
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41218 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41225 \begin_layout Section
41229 \begin_layout Standard
41230 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41235 \begin_inset Index idx
41238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41239 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41249 \begin_inset Index idx
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41253 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41261 Sectioned bibliography
41263 using the LaTeX package
41268 \begin_inset Index idx
41271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41272 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41277 and you can select a
41281 for the generation of the bibliography.
41282 For a further description see section
41283 \begin_inset space ~
41287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41289 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41296 \begin_layout Section
41300 \begin_layout Standard
41301 Here you can define the
41305 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41307 \begin_inset space ~
41311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41313 reference "sec:Index"
41320 \begin_layout Section
41324 \begin_layout Standard
41325 The PDF properties are explained in section
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41332 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41339 \begin_layout Section
41343 \begin_layout Standard
41344 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41349 \begin_inset Index idx
41352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41353 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41363 \begin_inset Index idx
41366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41367 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41377 \begin_inset Index idx
41380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41381 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41391 \begin_inset Index idx
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41395 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41400 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41403 \begin_layout Description
41404 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41405 ensure that you have enabled
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41416 \begin_layout Description
41417 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41432 \begin_layout Description
41433 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41444 \begin_layout Description
41445 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41447 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41456 \begin_layout Section
41460 \begin_layout Standard
41461 The float placement options are described in the section
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41472 \begin_inset space ~
41480 \begin_layout Section
41484 \begin_layout Standard
41485 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41487 Program Code Listings
41492 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_layout Section
41504 \begin_layout Standard
41505 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41513 set to be used and set the
41518 The itemize environment is described in section
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41525 reference "sec:Itemize"
41532 \begin_layout Standard
41533 You can furthermore specify a
41536 \begin_inset space ~
41541 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41542 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41549 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41551 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41555 \begin_inset space \space{}
41559 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41569 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41570 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41573 \begin_layout Standard
41574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41582 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41585 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41586 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41588 \begin_inset space ~
41594 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41598 usepackage{textcomp}
41601 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41605 usepackage{amssymb}
41615 \begin_layout Section
41619 \begin_layout Standard
41620 Branches are described in section
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41627 reference "sec:Branches"
41634 \begin_layout Section
41636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41638 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41645 \begin_layout Standard
41646 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41649 \begin_layout Description
41651 \begin_inset space ~
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41658 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41678 View Master Document
41679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41686 Update Master Document
41687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41694 menu or the toolbar.
41695 The default is set in
41697 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41698 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41703 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41713 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41720 \begin_layout Description
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41726 \begin_inset space ~
41729 Output settings for the menu
41731 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41739 For a detailed description see section
41741 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41746 \begin_inset space ~
41754 \begin_layout Description
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41763 Options offers settings for the export format
41769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41787 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41788 \begin_inset space ~
41791 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41800 settings are described in detail in section
41802 Math Output in XHTML
41807 \begin_inset space ~
41816 \begin_inset space ~
41820 \begin_inset space ~
41825 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41828 \begin_layout Section
41833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41843 \begin_layout Standard
41844 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
41845 or to define LaTeX-commands.
41846 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
41847 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
41851 \begin_layout Standard
41852 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41859 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
41866 \begin_layout Chapter
41872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41874 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41879 \begin_inset Index idx
41882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41891 \begin_layout Standard
41892 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
41894 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41898 It has the following submenus.
41901 \begin_layout Section
41905 \begin_layout Subsection
41909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41910 User Interface File
41911 \begin_inset Index idx
41914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41915 Customization ! of toolbars
41921 \begin_inset Index idx
41924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41925 Customization ! of menus
41933 \begin_layout Standard
41934 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
41935 interface (ui) file.
41936 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
41944 \begin_layout Description
41949 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
41952 \begin_layout Description
41959 the menu entries in popup context menus
41962 \begin_layout Description
41967 specifies the toolbar buttons
41970 \begin_layout Standard
41971 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
41972 and edit the entries.
41975 \begin_layout Standard
41976 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
41988 entries must be finished with an explicit
42013 and in the case of the
42014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42026 The syntax for the entries is:
42029 \begin_layout Standard
42030 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42058 \begin_layout Standard
42060 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42063 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42065 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42078 \begin_inset space ~
42086 \begin_layout Standard
42087 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42093 \begin_layout Standard
42094 For example, assuming you use the menu
42096 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42099 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42103 \begin_layout Standard
42104 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42128 \begin_layout Standard
42130 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42145 to have the sixth bookmark.
42148 \begin_layout Standard
42152 \begin_inset space ~
42157 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42158 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42162 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42173 \begin_layout Standard
42176 Enable tool tips in main work area
42178 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42186 \begin_layout Standard
42189 Restore window layouts and geometries
42191 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42192 in the last LyX session.
42195 \begin_layout Standard
42198 Restore cursor positions
42200 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42204 \begin_layout Standard
42207 Load opened files from last session
42209 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42212 \begin_layout Standard
42215 Clear all session information
42217 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42218 of last opened documents, etc.).
42221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42225 name "sub:Backup documents"
42230 \begin_inset Index idx
42233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42242 \begin_layout Standard
42245 Backup original documents when saving
42247 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42248 it was saved the last time.
42249 It is stored in the
42252 \begin_inset space ~
42258 \begin_inset space ~
42262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42264 reference "sec:Paths"
42268 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42277 The backup file has the file extension
42278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42292 \begin_layout Standard
42295 Backup documents, every
42297 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42300 \begin_layout Standard
42303 Save documents compressed by default
42305 always saves files in a compressed format.
42308 \begin_layout Standard
42313 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42316 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42318 \begin_inset space ~
42326 \begin_layout Standard
42329 Open documents in tabs
42331 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42334 \begin_layout Standard
42339 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42351 reference "sec:Paths"
42355 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42361 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42363 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42366 \begin_layout Standard
42369 Single close-tab button
42371 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42374 \begin_inset Graphics
42375 filename ../images/closetab.png
42382 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42383 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42386 \begin_layout Standard
42387 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42395 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42403 \begin_layout Subsection
42405 \begin_inset Index idx
42408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42417 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42424 \begin_layout Standard
42425 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42428 \begin_layout Standard
42429 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42437 This section only deals with the fonts
42442 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42445 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42446 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42457 \begin_layout Standard
42458 By default, LyX uses
42474 (depends on the system) as its
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42493 \begin_layout Standard
42494 You can change the font size with the
42501 \begin_layout Standard
42506 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42511 points have the size of 1
42512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42522 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42527 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42532 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42539 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42546 \begin_layout Standard
42549 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42551 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42552 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42553 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42554 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42556 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42557 \begin_inset space ~
42563 \begin_layout Subsection
42565 \begin_inset Index idx
42568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42575 \begin_inset Index idx
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42587 \begin_layout Standard
42588 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42589 the list and selecting the
42596 \begin_layout Standard
42597 By checking the option
42601 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42604 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42614 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42617 \begin_layout Subsection
42619 \begin_inset Index idx
42622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42631 \begin_layout Standard
42632 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42635 \begin_layout Standard
42640 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42641 This feature is described in section
42642 \begin_inset space ~
42646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42648 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42655 \begin_layout Standard
42656 Checking the option
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42667 \begin_inset space ~
42672 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42675 \begin_layout Section
42677 \begin_inset Index idx
42680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42689 \begin_layout Subsection
42693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42697 \begin_layout Standard
42700 Cursor follows scrollbar
42702 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42706 \begin_layout Standard
42707 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42708 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42709 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42712 \begin_layout Standard
42715 Scroll below end of document
42717 is self-explanatory.
42720 \begin_layout Standard
42721 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42728 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42730 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42731 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42734 \begin_layout Standard
42737 Sort environments alphabetically
42739 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42742 \begin_layout Standard
42745 Group environments by their category
42747 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42750 \begin_layout Standard
42755 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42770 \begin_layout Standard
42771 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42776 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42777 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42781 \begin_layout Subsection
42783 \begin_inset Index idx
42786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42793 \begin_inset Index idx
42796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42797 Settings ! Shortcuts
42805 \begin_layout Standard
42810 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
42811 Several binding files are available, among them:
42814 \begin_layout Description
42815 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42818 \begin_layout Description
42819 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42831 \begin_layout Description
42832 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42843 \begin_layout Standard
42844 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
42849 , and binding files for special languages.
42850 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
42851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42855 \begin_inset space \space{}
42859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42867 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
42871 \begin_layout Standard
42872 Some binding files, like
42876 , only have a limited scope.
42877 When looking at the end of the file
42881 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
42884 \begin_layout Standard
42888 \begin_inset space ~
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42897 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
42898 in the selected key binding file.
42901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42905 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
42910 \begin_inset Index idx
42913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42914 Key Bindings ! Editing
42922 \begin_layout Standard
42923 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
42924 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
42925 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
42928 Show key-bindings containing
42931 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
42932 Insert there for example as keyword
42933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42940 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
42941 functions that contain
42942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42950 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
42951 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
42955 that you will find in the
42962 \begin_layout Standard
42963 For example, to add the shortcut
42971 , select the function and press the
42976 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
42977 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
42980 \begin_layout Standard
42981 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
42982 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
42983 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
42984 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
42985 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
42990 \begin_layout Standard
42991 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
42994 \begin_layout Standard
42995 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
42997 The syntax of the entries is:
43000 \begin_layout Standard
43006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43024 \begin_layout Subsection
43026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43028 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43033 \begin_inset Index idx
43036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43043 \begin_inset Index idx
43046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43047 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43055 \begin_layout Standard
43056 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43057 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43058 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43059 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43062 \begin_inset space ~
43066 \begin_inset space ~
43071 and select the keyboard map file named
43078 \begin_layout Standard
43087 keyboard map and, if you use the
43091 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43094 arg "keymap-primary"
43100 arg "keymap-secondary"
43103 respectively or toggle between them with
43106 arg "keymap-toggle"
43112 \begin_layout Standard
43113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43121 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43130 \begin_layout Standard
43131 You can also specify the mouse
43133 Wheel scrolling speed
43136 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43140 \begin_layout Standard
43148 \begin_inset space ~
43152 \begin_inset space ~
43157 you can select a key for zooming.
43158 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43161 \begin_layout Subsection
43165 \begin_layout Standard
43166 Input completion is described in section
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43173 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43180 \begin_layout Section
43182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43189 \begin_inset Index idx
43192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43199 \begin_inset Index idx
43202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43211 \begin_layout Standard
43212 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43214 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43217 \begin_layout Description
43219 \begin_inset space ~
43222 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43223 It is the default when you
43234 \begin_inset space ~
43242 \begin_layout Description
43244 \begin_inset space ~
43247 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43249 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43255 \begin_inset space ~
43263 \begin_layout Description
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43268 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43274 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43278 \begin_inset Newline newline
43282 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43294 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43302 \begin_layout Description
43304 \begin_inset space ~
43308 \begin_inset Index idx
43311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43317 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43318 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43319 \begin_inset space ~
43323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43325 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43333 will be used to save the backups.
43334 \begin_inset Newline newline
43337 Backup files have the ending
43338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43348 \begin_layout Description
43353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 \begin_inset space ~
43364 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43365 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43366 \begin_inset Newline newline
43373 You add a BibTeX-database
43378 You can edit this file with the program
43387 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43390 \begin_inset space ~
43396 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43401 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43402 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43408 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43409 \begin_inset Newline newline
43412 The pipe is also used for the
43417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43423 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43428 \begin_inset Newline newline
43431 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43432 \begin_inset Newline newline
43448 \begin_layout Description
43450 \begin_inset space ~
43453 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43456 \begin_layout Description
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43461 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43462 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43463 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43466 \begin_layout Description
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43471 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43477 You only need to specify it if you are using
43481 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43487 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43491 \begin_layout Description
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43496 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43497 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43498 where to find it on the system.
43499 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43500 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43509 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43510 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43513 \begin_layout Description
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43518 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43519 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43521 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43523 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43524 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43525 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43526 scanned for the input files.
43527 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43528 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43529 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43530 compilation may fail for some documents.
43533 \begin_layout Section
43537 \begin_layout Standard
43538 Here you can insert your
43547 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43555 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43559 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43562 \begin_layout Section
43564 \begin_inset Index idx
43567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43568 Language ! Settings
43574 \begin_inset Index idx
43577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43578 Settings ! Language
43586 \begin_layout Subsection
43588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43590 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43597 \begin_layout Description
43599 \begin_inset space ~
43603 \begin_inset space ~
43606 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43607 You can find its actual translation status here:
43608 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43610 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43617 \begin_layout Description
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43622 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43624 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43625 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43642 The most widespread language package is
43647 \begin_inset Index idx
43650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43651 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43656 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43657 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43658 alternative language package
43663 \begin_inset Index idx
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43667 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43672 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43673 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43679 The available selections are described in section
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43686 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43693 \begin_layout Description
43695 \begin_inset space ~
43698 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43699 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43700 An example is the start command
43706 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43711 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43726 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43731 \begin_layout Description
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43741 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43742 command toggles the package on and off.
43745 \begin_layout Description
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43754 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43758 \begin_layout Description
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43767 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43768 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43769 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43770 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43777 \begin_layout Description
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43782 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43784 When this option is not set, the
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43792 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
43793 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_layout Description
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43812 \begin_inset space ~
43818 When it is not set, the
43821 \begin_inset space ~
43826 is set to the end of the document.
43829 \begin_layout Description
43831 \begin_inset space ~
43835 \begin_inset space ~
43838 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
43839 language will be underlined in blue.
43842 \begin_layout Description
43844 \begin_inset space ~
43848 \begin_inset space ~
43851 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
43852 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
43855 \begin_layout Description
43857 \begin_inset space ~
43860 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
43861 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
43862 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
43863 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
43866 \begin_layout Subsection
43870 \begin_layout Standard
43871 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
43872 \begin_inset space ~
43876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43878 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43885 \begin_layout Section
43889 \begin_layout Subsection
43893 \begin_layout Description
43895 \begin_inset space ~
43899 \begin_inset space ~
43902 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
43905 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43906 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43908 \begin_inset space ~
43914 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
43917 \begin_layout Description
43919 \begin_inset space ~
43923 \begin_inset Index idx
43926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43933 \begin_inset Index idx
43936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43937 Settings ! Date format
43942 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
43943 \begin_inset Newline newline
43947 \begin_inset Flex URL
43950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43952 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
43958 \begin_inset Newline newline
43961 For example the format
43962 \begin_inset Newline newline
43966 \begin_inset Newline newline
43969 prints the date as day/month/year.
43972 \begin_layout Description
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43981 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
43984 \begin_layout Description
43986 \begin_inset space ~
43989 search Commands that will be used for the menu
43991 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43993 \begin_inset space ~
43999 For a detailed description see section
44001 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44014 \begin_layout Subsection
44016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44023 \begin_inset Index idx
44026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44033 \begin_inset Index idx
44036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44045 \begin_layout Description
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44050 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44055 The name will be used when the
44060 \begin_inset Newline newline
44064 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44072 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44080 \begin_layout Description
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44085 command is the command LyX
44086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44093 LaTeX uses for printing.
44101 \begin_layout Description
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44107 \begin_inset space ~
44110 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44111 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44112 of the program that provides the
44119 \begin_layout Description
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44129 \begin_inset space ~
44132 printer This option works only for the
44137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44149 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44150 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44153 \begin_layout Subsection
44158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44168 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44173 \begin_inset Index idx
44176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44185 \begin_layout Description
44187 \begin_inset space ~
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44206 \begin_inset space ~
44209 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44214 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44235 are used for Cyrillic.
44236 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44249 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44250 LyX sets up in the background.
44251 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44254 \begin_layout Description
44256 \begin_inset space ~
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44263 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44268 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44271 \begin_layout Description
44273 \begin_inset space ~
44277 \begin_inset space ~
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44285 \begin_inset space ~
44288 options They only have an effect when the program
44292 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44295 \begin_layout Standard
44296 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44297 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44298 manuals of the applications.
44301 \begin_layout Description
44303 \begin_inset space ~
44306 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44313 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44320 \begin_layout Description
44322 \begin_inset space ~
44325 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44332 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44339 \begin_layout Description
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44344 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44351 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44358 \begin_layout Description
44363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44374 command Command for the program
44378 that is described in the section
44384 Additional Features
44389 \begin_layout Standard
44390 There are additionally the following options:
44393 \begin_layout Description
44395 \begin_inset space ~
44399 \begin_inset space ~
44403 \begin_inset space ~
44407 \begin_inset space ~
44411 \begin_inset space ~
44414 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44432 to separate folders.
44433 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44434 \begin_inset Index idx
44437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44444 \begin_inset Index idx
44447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44456 \begin_layout Description
44458 \begin_inset space ~
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44466 \begin_inset space ~
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44474 \begin_inset space ~
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44481 changes Removes all manually set
44487 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44488 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44490 \begin_inset space ~
44495 dialog when changing the document class.
44498 \begin_layout Section
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44504 \begin_inset Index idx
44507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44516 \begin_layout Subsection
44518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44520 name "sub:Converters"
44525 \begin_inset Index idx
44528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44537 \begin_layout Standard
44538 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44539 from one format to another.
44540 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44541 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44548 \begin_inset space ~
44553 field and press the
44558 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44562 \begin_inset space ~
44567 drop-down list, modify the
44571 field and press the
44578 \begin_layout Standard
44581 Converter File Cache
44587 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44589 Maximum Age (in days
44592 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44593 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44596 \begin_layout Standard
44597 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44598 definition, is described in the section
44609 \begin_layout Subsection
44611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44613 name "sec:File-Formats"
44618 \begin_inset Index idx
44621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44628 \begin_inset Index idx
44631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44640 \begin_layout Standard
44641 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44650 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44653 \begin_layout Standard
44654 You can also define the
44656 Default output format
44658 that is used when you use
44660 View, Update, View Master Document
44664 Update Master Document
44670 menu or the toolbar.
44673 \begin_layout Standard
44674 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44685 \begin_layout Standard
44686 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44687 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44688 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44689 This is done by specifying a
44694 More about this is described in the section
44705 \begin_layout Chapter
44706 Units available in LyX
44707 \begin_inset Index idx
44710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44719 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44726 \begin_layout Standard
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44734 reference "tab:Units"
44738 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44741 \begin_layout Standard
44742 \begin_inset Float table
44748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44749 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44767 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44775 \begin_inset Tabular
44776 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
44777 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
44778 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44779 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44930 scaled point (65536
44931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44991 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
44995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45046 % of original image width
45053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45260 \begin_layout Chapter
45262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45264 name "chap:Credits"
45271 \begin_layout Standard
45272 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45273 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45276 \begin_layout Itemize
45279 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45282 \begin_layout Itemize
45288 \begin_layout Itemize
45294 \begin_layout Itemize
45300 \begin_layout Itemize
45306 \begin_layout Itemize
45312 \begin_layout Itemize
45318 \begin_layout Itemize
45324 \begin_layout Itemize
45327 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45330 \begin_layout Itemize
45336 \begin_layout Itemize
45342 \begin_layout Itemize
45348 \begin_layout Itemize
45354 \begin_layout Itemize
45360 \begin_layout Itemize
45366 \begin_layout Itemize
45372 \begin_layout Itemize
45378 \begin_layout Itemize
45380 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45389 \begin_layout Standard
45390 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45393 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45400 \begin_layout Bibliography
45401 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45402 LatexCommand bibitem
45409 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45412 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45417 \begin_inset Newline newline
45421 \begin_inset Flex URL
45424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45426 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45434 \begin_layout Bibliography
45435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45436 LatexCommand bibitem
45437 key "latexcompanion"
45441 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45443 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45446 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45449 \begin_layout Bibliography
45450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45451 LatexCommand bibitem
45456 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45459 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45462 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45465 \begin_layout Bibliography
45466 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45467 LatexCommand bibitem
45474 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45477 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45480 \begin_layout Bibliography
45481 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45482 LatexCommand bibitem
45494 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45497 \begin_layout Bibliography
45498 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45499 LatexCommand bibitem
45505 \begin_inset Newline newline
45509 \begin_inset Flex URL
45512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45514 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45522 \begin_layout Bibliography
45523 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45524 LatexCommand bibitem
45530 \begin_inset Newline newline
45534 \begin_inset Flex URL
45537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45539 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45547 \begin_layout Bibliography
45548 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45549 LatexCommand bibitem
45555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45557 name "Documentation"
45558 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45567 \begin_inset Newline newline
45571 \begin_inset Flex URL
45574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45576 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45584 \begin_layout Bibliography
45585 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45586 LatexCommand bibitem
45592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45594 name "Documentation"
45595 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45599 how to use the program
45604 \begin_inset Newline newline
45608 \begin_inset Flex URL
45611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45613 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45621 \begin_layout Bibliography
45622 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45623 LatexCommand bibitem
45629 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45631 name "Documentation"
45632 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45641 \begin_inset Newline newline
45645 \begin_inset Flex URL
45648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45650 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45658 \begin_layout Bibliography
45659 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45660 LatexCommand bibitem
45666 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45668 name "Documentation"
45669 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45678 \begin_inset Newline newline
45682 \begin_inset Flex URL
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45687 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45695 \begin_layout Bibliography
45696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45697 LatexCommand bibitem
45703 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45705 name "Documentation"
45706 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45710 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45711 \begin_inset Newline newline
45715 \begin_inset Flex URL
45718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45728 \begin_layout Bibliography
45729 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45730 LatexCommand bibitem
45736 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45738 name "Documentation"
45739 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45743 of the LaTeX-package
45748 \begin_inset Index idx
45751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45752 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45758 \begin_inset Newline newline
45762 \begin_inset Flex URL
45765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45767 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45775 \begin_layout Bibliography
45776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45777 LatexCommand bibitem
45783 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45785 name "Documentation"
45786 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
45790 of the LaTeX-package
45795 \begin_inset Index idx
45798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45799 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
45805 \begin_inset Newline newline
45809 \begin_inset Flex URL
45812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45814 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
45822 \begin_layout Bibliography
45823 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45824 LatexCommand bibitem
45830 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45832 name "Documentation"
45833 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
45837 of the LaTeX-package
45842 \begin_inset Index idx
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45846 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
45852 \begin_inset Newline newline
45856 \begin_inset Flex URL
45859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45861 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
45869 \begin_layout Bibliography
45870 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45871 LatexCommand bibitem
45877 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45879 name "Documentation"
45880 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
45884 of the LaTeX-package
45889 \begin_inset Index idx
45892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45893 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
45899 \begin_inset Newline newline
45903 \begin_inset Flex URL
45906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45908 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
45916 \begin_layout Bibliography
45917 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45918 LatexCommand bibitem
45924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45926 name "Documentation"
45927 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
45931 of the LaTeX-package
45936 \begin_inset Index idx
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45940 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
45946 \begin_inset Newline newline
45950 \begin_inset Flex URL
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
45963 \begin_layout Bibliography
45964 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45965 LatexCommand bibitem
45971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45973 name "Documentation"
45974 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
45978 of the LaTeX-package
45983 \begin_inset Index idx
45986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
45993 \begin_inset Newline newline
45997 \begin_inset Flex URL
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46002 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46010 \begin_layout Bibliography
46011 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46012 LatexCommand bibitem
46018 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46020 name "Documentation"
46021 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46025 of the LaTeX-package
46030 \begin_inset Index idx
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46040 \begin_inset Newline newline
46044 \begin_inset Flex URL
46047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46057 \begin_layout Bibliography
46058 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46059 LatexCommand bibitem
46065 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46068 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46072 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46073 \begin_inset Newline newline
46077 \begin_inset Flex URL
46080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46082 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46090 \begin_layout Bibliography
46091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46092 LatexCommand bibitem
46098 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46101 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46105 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46106 \begin_inset Newline newline
46110 \begin_inset Flex URL
46113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46115 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46123 \begin_layout Bibliography
46124 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46125 LatexCommand bibitem
46131 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46134 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46138 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46139 \begin_inset Newline newline
46143 \begin_inset Flex URL
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46148 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46156 \begin_layout Bibliography
46157 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46158 LatexCommand bibitem
46164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46167 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46171 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46172 \begin_inset Newline newline
46176 \begin_inset Flex URL
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46181 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46189 \begin_layout Bibliography
46190 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46191 LatexCommand bibitem
46197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46200 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46204 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46205 \begin_inset Newline newline
46209 \begin_inset Flex URL
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46214 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46222 \begin_layout Bibliography
46223 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46224 LatexCommand bibitem
46230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46233 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46237 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46238 \begin_inset Newline newline
46242 \begin_inset Flex URL
46245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46247 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46255 \begin_layout Bibliography
46256 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46257 LatexCommand bibitem
46263 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46266 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46270 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46271 \begin_inset Newline newline
46275 \begin_inset Flex URL
46278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46280 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46288 \begin_layout Bibliography
46289 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46290 LatexCommand bibitem
46296 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46299 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46303 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46304 \begin_inset Newline newline
46308 \begin_inset Flex URL
46311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46313 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46321 \begin_layout Bibliography
46322 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46323 LatexCommand bibitem
46329 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46332 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46336 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46337 \begin_inset Newline newline
46341 \begin_inset Flex URL
46344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46346 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46354 \begin_layout Bibliography
46355 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46356 LatexCommand bibitem
46362 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46365 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46369 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46370 \begin_inset Newline newline
46374 \begin_inset Flex URL
46377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46379 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46387 \begin_layout Bibliography
46388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46389 LatexCommand bibitem
46395 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46398 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46402 about new features in
46407 \begin_inset Newline newline
46411 \begin_inset Flex URL
46414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46424 \begin_layout Standard
46425 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46459 \begin_inset Note Note
46462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46469 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46470 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46471 bibliography is the second one:
46479 \begin_layout Standard
46480 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46481 LatexCommand bibtex
46482 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46483 options "biblio/alphadin"
46490 \begin_layout Standard
46491 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46494 \begin_layout Standard
46495 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46496 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46502 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46503 LatexCommand printindex